- uniform formatting, clarifications, simplifications, updates, added missing information
- German Customization.lyx: also translations, added missing information that is already in the other language versions
\end_inset
Adds information to the document preamble.
- Must end with
+ Must end with
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
declarations.
- (Use
+ (Use
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
MMMMM
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- A string that indicates the width of the right margin on the screen, for
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] A string that indicates the width of the right margin on the screen, for
example,
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
MMMMM
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
\end_inset
- Sets which divisions get numbered.
- Corresponds to the
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Sets which divisions get numbered.
+ Corresponds to the
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- This sequence defines a paragraph style.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] This sequence defines a paragraph style.
If the style does not yet exist, it is created; if it does exist, its parameter
s are modified.
Must end with
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle 1
+InTitle
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- corresponds to the case where the block of paragraphs which have
+ corresponds to the case where all layouts which have
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle 1
+InTitle
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- Sets which divisions are included in the table of contents.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Sets which divisions are included in the table of contents.
Corresponds to the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PageStyle
+Other
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string="empty|plain|headings|fancy"
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] The list of available page styles, separated by
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
+] Some document class options, separated by a comma, that will be added
+ to the optional part of the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-|
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+documentclass
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
+ command.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Other
+PageStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+string="empty|plain|headings|fancy"
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Some document class options, separated by a comma, that will be added
- to the optional part of the
+] The list of available page sty\SpecialChar \-
+les, separated by
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-documentclass
+|
\end_layout
\end_inset
- command.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
.
- See section
+ See section
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[string]
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The category for this style.
+] The category for this style.
This is used to group related styles in the style combobox on the toolbar.
Any string can be used, but you may want to use existing categories with
your own styles.
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:CopyStyle"
-
-\end_inset
-
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[string]
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Copies all the features of an existing style into the current one.
+] Copies all the features of an existing style into the current one.
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The name of a style whose preamble should be output
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] The name of a style whose preamble should be output
\emph on
before
\emph default
\end_inset
- is
+ is
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
(resp.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
Filled_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:FreeSpacing"
-
-\end_inset
-
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] Usually LyX doesn't allow you to insert more than one space between words,
+] Usually LyX does not allow you to insert more than one space between words,
since a space is considered as the separation between two words, not a
character or symbol of its own.
This is a very fine thing but sometimes annoying, for example, when typing
\end_inset
- [[FIXME]] (Used only with XML-type formats.)
+ [FIXME] (Used only with XML-type formats.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] If
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[1, 0]
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- If 1, marks the style as to be included in the document preamble rather
- than in the document body.
+, marks the style as to be included in the document preamble and not in
+ the document body.
This is useful for document classes that want such information as the title
and author to appear in the preamble.
Note that this works only for styles for which the
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[1, 0]
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- If 1, marks the style as being part of a title block (see also the
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TitleLatexType
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+] If
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TitleLatexName
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- global entries).
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+, marks the style as being part of a title block (see also the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemSep
+TitleLatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ and
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+TitleLatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] This provides extra space between paragraphs that have the same style.
- If you put other styles into an environment, each is separated with the
+ global entries).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ItemSep
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float=0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] This provides extra space between paragraphs that have the same style.
+ If you put other styles into an environment, each is separated with the
environment's
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parsep
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Itemsep
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- [[FIXME]] (Used only with XML-type formats.)
+ [FIXME] (Used only with XML-type formats.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:KeepEmpty"
-
-\end_inset
-
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- [float=0] The vertical space between the label and the text body.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float=0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] The vertical space between the label and the text body.
Only used for labels that are above the text body (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+ and
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-The name of the counter for automatic numbering.
-
+] The name of the counter for automatic numbering.
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
.
In that case, the counter will be stepped each time the style appears.
-
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
\end_inset
-, and
+ and
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- Text that indicates how far a label should be indented.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string=""
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Text that indicates how far a label should be indented.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-] The horizontal space between the label and the text body.
+] Text that indicates the amount of horizontal space between the label and
+ the text body.
Only used for labels that are not above the text body.
\end_layout
\end_inset
- labeltype.
- When
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter
+LabelType
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- is set, this string can be contain the special formatting commands described
- in Section
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Counters"
-
\end_inset
.
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-For the sake of backwards compatibility, the string
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-@
-\emph on
-style-name
-\emph default
-@
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- will be replaced by the expanded
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- of style
+ When
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-style-name
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- This feature is now obsolete and should be replaced by the mechanisms of
- Section
+ is set, this string can be contain the special formatting commands described
+ in Section
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Counters"
.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] This is used inside the appendix instead of
+] This is used inside the appendix instead of
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- statement resets
+ statement resets
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\emph on
No_Label
\emph default
-, Manual, Static, Top_Environment, Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive,
- Enumerate, Itemize, Bibliography
+, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Itemize, Bibliography
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+]
\end_layout
\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
means the label is the very first word (up to the first real blank).
- Use protected spaces (like
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-that one) if you want more than one word as the label.
+ Use protected spaces if you want more than one word as the label.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- means the label is simply whatever
+ means the label is simply what is declared as
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- declares it to be.
+.
Note that this really is `static'.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- and
+
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+and
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
style, for example.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
.
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
with the float.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-The
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- label type defines automatically numbered labels.
+ defines automatically numbered labels.
The
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- will be expanded to resolve any counter references it contains: For example,
- it might be
+ will be expanded to contain any counters: So the result will for example
+ be
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
\end_inset
.
- See Section
+ See Section
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Counters"
for more information on counters.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
small Roman numerals, and uppercase letters for the four possible depths.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
It is also hardcoded.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- The name of the corresponding LaTeX stuff.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] The name of the corresponding LaTeX stuff.
Either the environment or command name.
\end_layout
\end_inset
- An optional parameter for the corresponding
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<parameter>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] An optional parameter for the corresponding
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:LatexType"
-
-\end_inset
-
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
Paragraph
\emph default
, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\end_layout
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
List_Environment, Bib_Environment
\end_layout
\end_layout
\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
means nothing special.
-
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-, except that
+, except that
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
is passed as an argument to the environment.
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\bar under
-Edit
-\bar default
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-
-\bar under
-P
-\bar default
-aragraph
+Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Paragraph
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
dialog.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Bib_Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is like
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ but adds additionally the necessary mandatory argument to the begin statement
+ of the bibliography environment:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+begin{thebibliography}{99}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ It is therefore only useful for bibliography environments.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
-latexname[latexparam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
}
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
-begin{latexname}[latexparam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\backslash
-end{latexname}.
+end{LatexName}.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
-] If you put styles into environments, the leftmargins are not simply added,
- but added with a factor
-\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{depth+4}$
+] If you put styles into environments, the different
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LeftMargin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ are not simply added, but added with a factor
+\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{depth}+4}$
\end_inset
.
- Note that this parameter is also used when the margin is defined as
+ Note that this parameter is also used when
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Margin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is defined as
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
.
Then it is added to the manual or dynamic margin.
-
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-The argument is passed as a string.
- For example
+For example
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
.
This way was chosen so that the look is the same with each used screen
font.
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
The kind of margin that the style has on the left side.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
just means a fixed margin.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
dialog.
This is used to typeset nice lists without tabulators.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
are not able to do this.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
is similar, but only the very first row of the paragraph is dynamic, while
the others are static; this is used, for example, for descriptions.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
This is used to typeset an address on the right edge of the page.
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- Name of a style that has replaced this style.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Name of a style that has replaced this style.
This is used to rename a style, while keeping backward compatibility.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
at least, not without ERT (with which you can have anything).
-
\end_layout
\end_deeper
ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:ParbreakIsNewline"
-
\end_inset
[
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
] The indent of the very first line of a paragraph.
- The
+ The
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parsep
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- to typeset a document.
+ to separate paragraphs.
When
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- is chosen, this value is completely ignored.
+ is chosen,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Parskip
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is ignored.
When
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- is chosen, the parindent of a LaTeXtype
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+ is chosen,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParIndent
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-Paragraph
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+ is ignored and all paragraphs are separated by the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Parskip
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
- style is ignored and all paragraphs are separated by this parskip argument.
+ argument.
The vertical space is calculated with
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-value
+Parskip
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:PassThru"
-
-\end_inset
-
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:Preamble"
-
-\end_inset
-
-Information to be included in the LaTeX preamble when this style is used.
+ Information to be included in the LaTeX preamble when this style is used.
Used to define macros, load packages, etc., required by this particular
style.
Must end with
\end_inset
-]
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:Requires"
-
-\end_inset
-
-Whether the style requires the feature
+] Whether the style requires the feature
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- above (page
+ above (sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:FreeSpacing"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:General-text-class"
\end_inset
) for information on `features'.
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\emph on
single
-\emph default
-, onehalf, double, other
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph on
-value
-\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+onehalf
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+double
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+other
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<value>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
] This defines what the default spacing should be in the style.
The arguments
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
-, then you should also provide a numerical argument which will be the actual
- multiplier value.
+, then you must also provide a value argument which will be the actual multiplie
+r value.
Note that, contrary to other parameters,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- implies the generation of specific LaTeX code, using the package
+ implies the generation of specific LaTeX code, using the LaTeX package
+
\family roman
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace.sty
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] Spellcheck paragraphs of this style.
+] Allow spell-checking paragraphs of this style.
Default is true.
\end_layout
\series medium
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\series medium
-[int]
+int=3
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+]
\series default
The level of the style in the table of contents.
This is used for automatic numbering of section headings.
renewcommand{
\backslash
claimname}{Affirmation}}
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
addto
renewcommand{
\backslash
claimname}{Behauptung}}
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
providecommand{
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Since version 1.3.0 of LyX, it is both possible and necessary to define the
- floats (
+It is necessary to define the floats (
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
- These are used for XHTML output.
- See
+ These tags control the XHTML output.
+ See section
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
\emph on
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
0
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
] Indicates whether the float is already defined in the document class or
- if we instead need to load
+ if instead the LaTeX package
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and use what it provides to define it on-the-fly.
+ needs to be loaded to define it on-the-fly.
The default is
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-, which means: use
+, which means:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ is used.
It should be set to
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
] The command used to generate a list of floats of this type; the leading
`
\backslash
-' should be omitted.
+' must be omitted.
This
\emph on
must
] A title for a list of floats of this kind (list of figures, tables, or
whatever).
- It is used for the screen label within LyX; it is passed to LaTeX for use
- as the title there; and it is used as the title in XHTML output.
+ It is used for the screen label within LyX, it is used by LaTeX for the
+ title and it is used as the title in the XHTML output.
It will be translated to the document language.
\end_layout
] This (optional) argument determines whether floats of this class will
be numbered within some sectional unit of the document.
- For example, if within is equal to
+ For example, if
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NumberWithin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is set to
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
, the floats will be numbered within chapters.
\end_layout
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
0
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] Tells us whether this float is defined using the facilities provided by
-
+] Specifies whether this float is defined using the LaTeX package
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, either by the class file or a package, or on-the-fly by LyX itself.
+, either by the class file, another package or on-the-fly by LyX itself.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyX has supported character styles since version 1.4.0; as of version 1.6.0,
- these are called Flex insets.
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-InsetLayout <Type>
+InsetLayout <type>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Type>
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Type>
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Type>
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- The color for the inset's background.
- The valid colors are defined in
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] The color for the inset's background.
+ The valid color names are defined in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- As with paragraph styles (see page
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<type>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "des:CopyStyle"
+reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
-).
+.
+ Note that you need to specify the complete type, e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+g.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CopyStyle Flex:<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
.
- Indicates whether the environment will stand on its own in LaTeX output
- or will appear inline with the surrounding text.
+ Indicates whether the environment will stand on its own in the output or
+ will appear inline with the surrounding text.
If set to false, it is supposed that the LaTeX environment ignores white
space (including one newline character) after the
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
- Required at the end of the InsetLayout declarations.
+ Required at the end of the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ declarations.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- Force the
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Force the
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- language, leading to Left-to-Right (latin) output, e.
+ language, leading to Left-to-Right (Latin) output, e.
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- As with paragraph styles (see page
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:FreeSpacing"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
-).
- Default is false.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- These tags control XHTML output.
- See section
+ These tags control the XHTML output.
+ See section
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- As with paragraph styles (see page
+ [
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:KeepEmpty"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
-).
- Default is false.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- What will be displayed on the button or elsewhere as the inset label.
+] What will be displayed on the button or elsewhere as the inset label.
Some inset types (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- The name of the corresponding LaTeX stuff.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] The name of the corresponding LaTeX stuff.
Either the environment or command name.
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The optional parameter for the corresponding
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<parameter>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] The optional parameter for the corresponding
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- stuff, including possible bracket pairs like
+, including possible bracket pairs like
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- As with paragraph styles (see page
+ As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:LatexType"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
-).
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-, or
+ or
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- will set
+ will automatically set
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- can be set to true for charstyle insets, if you wish, by setting it
+ can be set to true for
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+charstyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ insets by setting it
\emph on
after
\emph default
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] As with paragraph styles (see page
+] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:ParbreakIsNewline"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
-).
+.
Default is false.
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] As with paragraph styles (see page
+] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:PassThru"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
-).
+.
Default is false.
\end_layout
\end_inset
- As with paragraph styles (see page
+ As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:Preamble"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
-).
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-] As with paragraph styles (see page
+] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:Requires"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
-).
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] Spellcheck the contents of this inset.
+] Allow spell-checking the contents of this inset.
Default is true.
\end_layout
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Since version 1.3.0 of LyX, it is both possible and necessary to define the
- counters (
+It is necessary to define the counters (
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Counter CounterName
+Counter <Name>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-where of course `
+where
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CounterName
+<Name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-' is replaced by the name of the counter.
+ is the name of the counter.
And it must end with
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
.
- The following parameters can also be used:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+The following parameters can also be used:
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-counter values can be expressed using LaTeX-like macros
+counter values can be expressed using LaTeX-like macros
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- can be:
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\family roman
-\series medium
-\shape up
-\size normal
-\emph off
-\bar no
-\noun off
-\color none
-Actually, the situation is a bit more complicated: any
-\family default
-\series default
-\shape default
-\emph default
-\bar default
-
-\size default
-\emph on
-\noun default
-\color inherit
-numbertype
-\family roman
-\series medium
-\shape up
-\size normal
-\emph off
-\bar no
-\noun off
- other than those described below will produce arabic numerals.
- It would not be surprising to see this change in the future.
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
+ can be:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- for upper-case roman numerals: I, II, III\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+ for upper-case roman numerals: I, II, III.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Standard
+If
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hebrew
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- for hebrew numerals.
-\end_layout
-
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-If LabelString is not defined, a default value is constructed as follows:
- if the counter has a master counter
+ is not defined, a default value is constructed as follows: if the counter
+ has a master counter
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-), the string
+), the string
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-Section 2.4
+Section
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+2.4
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
\end_inset
turns it off.
-
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
followed by the volume key.
It is also possible to have an else clause in the conditional, such as:
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-.
- Here, the
+
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Here, the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Standard
So here then is an example that use all these features:
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Standard
+\noindent
+
+\family typewriter
!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
This defines a macro that prints the author, followed by a comma, if the
\begin_inset Flex Code
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0,
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
1
\end_layout
Anstelle der Kommandozeilenoption können Sie übrigens auch die Umgebungsvariabl
e
\family typewriter
-LYX_USERDIR_VER
+LYX_USERDIR_20x
\family default
auf das zu verwendende Verzeichnis setzen.
\end_layout
\lang english
Note, by the way, that there is a template which has a particular meaning:
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
-Zeichen ignoriert werden.
Die erste Zeile ist einfach ein LaTeX-Kommentar, in der zweiten wird die
Textklasse deklariert.
- Eine Datei namens
+ Eine Datei namens
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\family typewriter
article.layout
\family default
\family default
\series default
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
1
-\emph default
-, 2
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+2
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-Gibt an, ob die Textklasse standardmäßig ein- oder zweispaltig gesetzt wird.
+] Gibt an, ob die Textklasse standardmäßig ein- oder zweispaltig gesetzt
+ wird.
Kann im Popup-Menü
\family sans
Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
LeftMargin
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ist eine Zeichenkette, deren Länge die Breite des linken Randes festlegt,
- zum Beispiel
+] ist ein String dessen Länge die Breite des linken Randes festlegt, zum
+ Beispiel
\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
MMMMM
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
\family typewriter
\series medium
-Preamble
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "Preamble"
-
-\end_inset
-
-\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+Preamble\SpecialChar \ldots{}
EndPreamble
\family default
\series default
\family typewriter
\series medium
-Provides
-\begin_inset space ~
+Provides
+\family default
+\series default
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-[string][
+] [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-1]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "Provides"
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+]
+\family typewriter
+
+\family default
zeigt an, ob die Klasse bereits die Funktion
\family typewriter
string
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
ProvidesModule
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-[string]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-zeigt an, dass dieses Layout die Funktionalität des Moduls
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+] zeigt an, dass dieses Layout die Funktionalität des Moduls
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
string
-\family default
-\series default
- liefert, das als Dateiname ohne die Erweiterung
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ anbietet, das als Dateiname ohne die Erweiterung
\family typewriter
.module
\family default
- spezifiziert ist.
- Dies wird typischerweise benutzt, um anzuzeigen, dass es benutzt werden
- sollte.
- Es könnte in einem Modul benutzt werden, das eine andere Implementation
+ angegeben wird.
+ Dies wird typischerweise benutzt, wenn das Layout das Modul direkt benutzt
+\lang english
+, rather than using the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+DefaultModule
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ tag to indicate that it ought to be used
+\lang ngerman
+.
+ Es könnte auch in einem Modul benutzt werden, das eine andere Implementation
derselben Funktion liefert.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+This will typically be used if the layout includes the module directl
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
Requires
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-[string]
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
+]
+\family typewriter
+
\family default
-\series default
zeigt an, ob die Klasse die Funktion
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
string
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
benötigt.
Mehrfache Funktionen müssen durch Komma getrennt werden Beachten Sie, dass
Sie nur unterstützte Funktionen anfordern können.
+
+\lang english
+(Again, see
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+LaTeXFeatures.cpp
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ for a list of these.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
RightMargin
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ist eine Zeichenkette, deren Länge die Breite des rechten Randes festlegt,
- zum Beispiel
+] ist ein String dessen Länge die Breite des rechten Randes festlegt, zum
+ Beispiel
\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
MMMMM
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
SecNumDepth
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-legt die Nummerierungstiefe fest und korrespondiert mit dem LaTeX-Zähler
-
-\family typewriter
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] legt die Nummerierungstiefe fest; korrespondiert mit dem LaTeX-Zähler
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
secnumdepth
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
Sides
-\family default
-\series default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
1
-\emph default
-, 2
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+2
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-Gibt an, ob der Text standardmäßig für ein- oder für zweiseitigen Druck
+] Gibt an, ob der Text standardmäßig für ein- oder für zweiseitigen Druck
gesetzt wird.
- Kann im Popup-Menü
-\family sans
+ Kann im Dialog
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Einstellungen
-\family default
-\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
geändert werden.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
Style
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Name>
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-definiert einen neuen Absatzstil.
+] definiert einen neuen Absatzstil.
Wenn er bereits existiert, werden stattdessen einige seiner Parameter neu
- definiert (siehe auch
+ definiert.
+ Muss mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+End
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ beendet werden.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
+LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
\end_inset
-).
- Diese Marke muss mit
-\family typewriter
-End
-\family default
- beendet werden.
+ für mehr über Absatzstile.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
TitleLatexName
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-[string="maketitle"]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string="maketitle"
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ist der Name des Befehls oder der Umgebung, der für
-\family typewriter
+] ist der Name des Befehls oder der Umgebung, der für
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
TitleLatexType
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
benutzt werden soll.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
TitleLatexType
-\begin_inset space ~
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-[
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
CommandAfter
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-Environment]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Environment
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-gibt an, wie der Dokumenttitel aussehen soll.
+] gibt an, wie der Dokumenttitel aussehen soll.
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
CommandAfter
-\family default
- bedeutet, dass das Makro namens
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-TitleLatexName
-\family default
-\series default
- nach dem letzten Layout mit
-\family typewriter
-InTitle
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-1
-\family default
- eingesetzt werden soll.
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Environment
-\family default
-\series default
- korrespondiert zu dem Fall, in dem der Absatzblock mit
-\family typewriter
-InTitle
-\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-1
-\family default
- in die
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+ bedeutet, dass das Makro namens
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
TitleLatexName
-\family default
-\series default
--Umgebung einge\SpecialChar \-
-schlos\SpecialChar \-
-sen werden soll.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-TocDepth
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+ nach dem letzten Layout mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InTitle
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-legt fest, bis zu welcher Tiefe das Inhaltsverzeichnis gehen soll und korrespond
-iert mit dem LaTeX-Zähler
-\family typewriter
-tocdepth
-\family default
-.
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Der Abschnitt
-\family typewriter
-ClassOptions
-\family default
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Der-Abschnitt-ClassOptions"
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
-
+ gesetzt werden soll.
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Environment
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
+
+ ist für den Fall, dass alle Layouts mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InTitle
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ in die
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TitleLatexName
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+-Umgebung gesetzt werden sollen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TocDepth
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] legt fest, bis zu welcher Tiefe das Inhaltsverzeichnis gehen soll; korrespondi
+ert mit dem LaTeX-Zähler
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+tocdepth
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
Der Abschnitt
\family typewriter
ClassOptions
\family default
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Der-Abschnitt-ClassOptions"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Der Abschnitt
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ClassOptions
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
kann folgende Einträge enthalten:
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
FontSize
-\family default
-\series default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
string="10|11|12"
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-Eine Liste verfügbarer Größen für den Hauptzeichensatz; die Einträge werden
+] Eine Liste verfügbarer Größen für den Hauptzeichensatz; die Einträge werden
mit
\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
Header
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-wird benutzt, um die DTD-Zeile mit XML-basierten Klassen zu setzen.
+ wird benutzt, um die DTD-Zeile mit XML-basierten Klassen zu setzen.
Zum Beispiel PUBLIC
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.2//EN
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
Other
-\begin_inset space ~
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family default
-[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
string=""
-\family default
-]
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+] Sonstige Optionen für die Dokumentenklasse, die durch Komma getrennt werden.
+ Sie werden in dem
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+documentclass
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Sonstige Optionen für die Dokumentenklasse, die durch Komma getrennt werden.
- Sie werden in dem
+
\family typewriter
-documentclass-
+-
\family default
Befehl als optionales Argument übergeben.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
PageStyle
-\family default
-\series default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
string="empty|plain|headings|fancy"
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-Eine Liste verfügbarer Seitenstile; die Einträge werden mit
+] Eine Liste verfügbarer Seitenstile; die Einträge werden mit
\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
getrennt.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+Der Abschnitt
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ClassOptions
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ muss mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+End
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ beendet werden.
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Subsection
Einzelne Absatz-Layouts
\begin_inset CommandInset label
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
Align
-\family default
-\series default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
block
\emph default
, left, right, center
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-Gibt an, ob der Text im Blocksatz linksbündig, rechtsbündig oder zentriert
+] Gibt an, ob der Text im Blocksatz linksbündig, rechtsbündig oder zentriert
gesetzt wird.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
AlignPossible
-\family default
-\series default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
block
\emph default
, left, right, center
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-Eine
-\emph on
-Liste
-\emph default
- von möglichen Textausrichtungen, die durch Kommata voneinander getrennt
- werden.
- Einige LaTeX-Stile verbieten bestimmte Ausrichtungen, weil sie keinen Sinn
- machen.
- Beispielsweise sollte in einer Aufzählung der Text nicht rechtsbündig oder
- zentriert gesetzt werden.
+] Eine Liste von möglichen Textausrichtungen, die durch Kommata voneinander
+ getrennt werden.
+ (Einige LaTeX-Stile verbieten bestimmte Ausrichtungen, weil sie keinen
+ Sinn machen.
+ Beispielsweise sollte in einer nummerierten Aufzählung der Text nicht rechtsbün
+dig oder zentriert gesetzt werden.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-Note that this will completely override any prior
+ Beachten Sie, dass dies alle vorhergehenden
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- declaration for this style.
- Must end with
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+-Dekla\SpecialChar \-
+ration für diesen Stil überschreibt.
+ Muss mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
EndBabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
-.
- See section
+ beendet werden.
+ Siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
- for details on its use.
+ für Details zur Verwendung.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
BottomSep
-\family default
-\series default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
float=0
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-Ähnlich wie
-\family typewriter
-TopSep
-\family default
- -- nur ist dies der Abstand nach einer Serie von Absätzen.
- Ist der
-\family typewriter
-TopSep
-\family default
- des nachfolgenden Layouts nicht 0, so werden die beiden Abstände
-\emph on
-nicht
-\emph default
- addiert, sondern LyX wählt das Maximum der beiden Abstände.
+float
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ ist eine Gleitkommazahl, wie
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+1,5
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Der vertikale Abstand, der die letzte Serie von Absätzen vom folgenden
+ Text trennt.
+ Wenn der nächste Paragraph einen anderen Stil hat, werden die Abstände
+ nicht einfach addiert, sondern das Maximum wird verwendet.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
Category
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-[string]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ist die Kategorie für diesen Stil.
+] ist die Kategorie für diesen Stil.
Sie wird benutzt, um zugehörige Stile in der Layout-Kombobox der Werkzeugleiste
zu gruppieren.
- Eine beliebige Zei\SpecialChar \-
-chenkette kann benutzt werden, aber vielleicht wollen
- Sie vorhandene Ka\SpecialChar \-
+ Jeder beliebige String kann benutzt werden, aber es ist sinnvoll vorhandene
+ Ka\SpecialChar \-
te\SpecialChar \-
-gorien zusammen mit Ihren eigenen Stilen benutzen.
+gorien zusammen mit Ihren eigenen Stilen zu benutzen.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
CommandDepth
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ist die Tiefe des XML-Befehls und wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.
+ ist die Tiefe des XML-Befehls und wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
CopyStyle
-\family default
-\series default
- Hiermit können Sie alle Optionen eines bereits definierten Layouts in das
- aktuelle kopieren.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Kopiert alle Eigenschaften eines bereits definierten Layouts in das aktuelle.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
DependsOn
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Name>
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ist der Name eines Stils, dessen Vorspann
+] ist der Name eines Stils, dessen Vorspann
\emph on
vor
\emph default
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-EndLabelType
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\family typewriter
-[
-\emph on
-No_Label
-\emph default
-, Box, Filled_Box, Static]
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+EndLabeltype
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
-\family default
-ist der Markentyp, der am Ende eines Absatzes steht (oder mehrerer Absätze,
- wenn
-\family typewriter
-LaTe
-\begin_inset ERT
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{}
+\emph on
+No_Label
+\emph default
+, Box, Filled_Box, Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-XType
-\family default
- auf
-\family typewriter
-Environment
-\family default
- ,
-\family typewriter
-Item_Environment
-\family default
- oder
-\family typewriter
-List_En\SpecialChar \-
-vironment
-\family default
- gesetzt ist).
- No_Label bedeutet
-\emph on
-nichts
-\emph default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Box
-\family default
- oder
+]
\family typewriter
-Filled_Box
-\family default
- ist ein weißes oder schwarzes Quadrat, das für das Markieren eines Beweisendes
- geeignet ist.
-\family typewriter
-Static
\family default
- ist eine explizite Zeichenkette.
-\end_layout
+ist der Markentyp, der am Ende eines Absatzes steht (oder mehrerer Absätze,
+ wenn
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-EndLabelString
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-[string=""]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+ auf
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-ist eine Zeichenkette, die für einen
-\family typewriter
-Static
-\family default
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-EndLabelType
-\family default
-\series default
- benutzt wird.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Environment
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Font
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Item_Environment
+\end_layout
-Der Zeichensatz, der für den Textkörper
-\emph on
-und
-\emph default
- die Marke verwendet wird (siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
+ oder
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
-
-\end_inset
-
-).
- Wird
-\family typewriter
-Font
-\family default
- gesetzt, dann erhält
-\family typewriter
-Label\SpecialChar \-
-Font
-\family default
- automatisch denselben Wert.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+List_Environment
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-FreeSpacing
-\family default
-\series default
- [
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-0
-\emph default
-, 1
-\family default
-]
+ gesetzt ist).
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "FreeSpacing"
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+No_Label
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-Normalerweise erlaubt es LyX nicht, mehr als ein Leerzeichen zwischen Wörtern
- einzufügen.
- Diese Eigenschaft kann in bestimmten Fällen umständ\SpecialChar \-
-lich sein, zum Beispiel,
- wenn ein Programmcode eingegeben werden soll.
- In solchen Fällen kann
-\family typewriter
-FreeSpacing
-\family default
- auf
-\family typewriter
-1
-\family default
- gesetzt werden.
- LyX erzeugt in diesem Fall für jedes zusätzliche Leerzeichen ein geschütztes
- Leerzeichen, es sei denn, LyX befindet sich im LaTeX-Modus.
-\end_layout
+ bedeutet
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
+nichts
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-HTML*
+Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
- These tags are used with XHTML output.
- See
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Paragraph-Style-XHTML"
-
-\end_inset
+ oder
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Filled_Box
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-InnerTag
-\family default
-\series default
+ ist ein weißes oder schwarzes Quadrat, das für das Markieren eines Beweisendes
+ geeignet ist.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Static
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.
+ ist eine explizite Zeichenkette.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InPreamble
+EndLabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[1, 0]
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-If 1, marks the style as to be included in the document preamble rather
- than in the document body.
- This is useful for document classes that want such information as the title
- and author to appear in the preamble.
- Note that this works only for styles for which the
+] ist eine Zeichenkette, die für einen
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LatexType
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is
+
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Command
+EndLabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- or
+ benutzt wird.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Paragraph
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-InTitle
-\family default
-\series default
- [
-\family typewriter
-1,
-\family default
-
-\family typewriter
+ Der Zeichensatz, der für den Textkörper
\emph on
-0
-\family default
+und
\emph default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+ die Marke verwendet wird, siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-Bei 1 wird nach dem Layout noch ein
-\family typewriter
-
-\backslash
-maketitle
-\family default
- in LaTeX eingefügt.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-ItemSep
-\family default
-\series default
- [
-\family typewriter
-float=0
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Dies ist ein zusätzlicher Abstand für die Unterpunkte eines
-\family typewriter
-Environment
-\family default
--Layouts.
- Wenn in solch einem Layout andere Layouts integriert werden, so werden
- diese mit
-\family typewriter
-ParSep
-\family default
- getrennt.
- Aber die einzelnen Unterpunkte der Umgebung werden
-\emph on
-zusätzlich
-\emph default
- mit
-\family typewriter
-ItemSep
-\family default
- getrennt.
+.
+ Wird
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Font
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+ gesetzt, dann erhält
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelFont
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-ItemTag
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ automatisch denselben Wert.
+ Daher sollte
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Font
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.
+ zuerst definiert werden.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+FreeSpacing
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-KeepEmpty
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\family typewriter
-[
-\emph on
-0
-\emph default
-, 1]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family default
-Normalerweise ist es in LyX nicht möglich, einen Absatz leer zu lassen,
- da das zu einer leeren LaTeX-Ausgabe führen würde.
- In manchen Fällen ist das aber durchaus gewünscht: So können beispielsweise
- in einer Briefvorlage die benötigten Felder leer voreingestellt werden,
- damit keiner vergisst, sie anzugeben.
- In anderen Klassen wird ein solcher Absatz als Unterbrechung verwendet,
- die keinen eigentlichen Text enthält.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelBottomSep
-\family default
-\series default
- [
-\family typewriter
-float=0
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-Der vertikale Abstand zwischen der Marke und dem folgenden Text.
- Wird nur für Marken benutzt, die über dem folgenden Text stehen (
-\family typewriter
-Top_En\SpecialChar \-
-vi\SpecialChar \-
-ron\SpecialChar \-
-ment
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Center\SpecialChar \-
-ed_Top_Environment
-\family default
-).
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelCounter
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
-[string=""]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+] Normalerweise erlaubt es LyX nicht, mehr als ein Leerzeichen zwischen
+ Wörtern einzufügen.
+ Diese Eigenschaft kann in bestimmten Fällen umständ\SpecialChar \-
+lich sein, zum Beispiel,
+ wenn ein Programmcode eingegeben werden soll.
+ In solchen Fällen kann
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+FreeSpacing
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ist der Name des Zählers zur automatischen Nummerierung (siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset Newline linebreak
-\end_inset
+ auf
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
-reference "sub:Zähler"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- für Einzelheiten).
- Er muss vorhanden sein, wenn
-\family typewriter
-LabelType
-\family default
-
-\family typewriter
-Counter
-\family default
- ist.
+ gesetzt werden.
+ LyX erzeugt in diesem Falls sich LyX nicht im LaTeX-Modus befindet, erzeugt
+ es für jedes zusätzliche Leerzeichen ein geschütztes Leerzeichen.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelFont
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTML*
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Der Zeichensatz, der für die Marke verwendet wird.
- (Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space \space{}
+ Diese Tags kontrollieren die XHTML-Ausgabe.
+ Siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
\end_inset
-.)
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelIndent
+InnerTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-Text that indicates how far a label should be indented.
+ [[FIXME]] (Wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelSep
-\family default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InPreamble
+\end_layout
-[
-\family typewriter
-string=""
-\family default
-]
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Der horizontale Abstand zwischen der Marke und dem folgenden Text.
- Wird nur für Marken benutzt, die nicht über dem folgenden Text stehen.
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelString
-\family default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-[
-\family typewriter
-string=""
-\family default
-]
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
-Der String, der für den
-\family typewriter
-LabelType
-\family default
-
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-Static
-\family default
-\emph default
- verwendet wird.
- Wenn
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Label\SpecialChar \-
-Counter
-\family default
-\series default
- gesetzt wurde, kann diese Zeichenkette spezielle Formatierungsbefehle enthalten
-, wie sie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
+]Wenn auf
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
-reference "sub:Zähler"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- be\SpecialChar \-
-schrieben sind.
-\begin_inset Foot
+gesetzt, wird der Stil in den LaTeX-Vorspann gesetzt und nicht in den eigentlich
+en Dokumenttext.
+ Dies ist nützlich für Dokumentklassen, die Informationen wie den Titel
+ und Autor im Vorspann erwarten.
+ Beachten Sie, dass dies nur für Stile funktioniert, deren
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Wegen der Rückwärtskompatibilität wird die Zeichenkette
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-@style-name@
-\family default
-\emph default
- durch den expandierten
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelString
-\family default
-\series default
- mit dem Stil
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-style-name
-\family default
-\emph default
- ersetzt.
- Diese Funktion ist jetzt überflüssig und sollte durch die Mechanismen,
- die in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space \space{}
+LatexType
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
-reference "sub:Zähler"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Command
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- beschrieben sind, ersetzt werden.
+ oder
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Paragraph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ist.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelStringAppendix
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InTitle
+\end_layout
-[
-\family default
-string=""
-\family typewriter
-]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-wird im Anhang anstatt
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelString
-\family default
-\series default
- benutzt.
- Beachten Sie, dass jeder
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelString
-\family default
-\series default
--Befehl auch
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelStringAppendix
-\family default
-\series default
- zurücksetzt.
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelTag
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelType
-\family default
-\series default
- [
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-No_Label
-\emph default
-, Manual, Static, Top_Environment, Centered_Top_
-\family default
+] Wenn auf
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline linebreak
\end_inset
+gesetzt, wird der Stil als Teil des Titel-Abschnitts behandelt (siehe auch
+ die allgemeinen Textklassen-Parameter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-En\SpecialChar \-
-vi\SpecialChar \-
-ron\SpecialChar \-
-ment, Sensitive, Counter
-\family default
-]
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TitleLatexType
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Manual
-\family default
-\series default
- bedeutet: die Marke ist das erste Wort (bis zum ersten echten Leerzeichen).
-\begin_inset Foot
+ und
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Wenn Sie mehr als ein Wort als Marke haben wollen, müssen Sie geschützte
- Leerzeichen benutzen.
+TitleLatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Static
-\family default
-\series default
- bedeutet: die Marke wird im Layout definiert (siehe:
-\family typewriter
-LabelString
-\family default
-).
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ItemSep
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Top_Environment
-\family default
- und
-\family typewriter
- Centered_Top_Environment
-\family default
-\series default
- sind Spezialfälle von
-\family typewriter
- Static
-\family default
-.
- Die Marke wird über dem Absatz abgebildet, aber nur am Anfang der Umgebung
- oder am Anfang einer Serie von Absätzen mit diesem Layout.
- Dies benutzt man zum Beispiel im
-\family sans
-Abstract
-\family default
--Layout oder im
-\family sans
-Bibliography
-\family default
--Layout.
- Dasselbe trifft auch für
-\family typewriter
-Manual
-\family default
--Marken mit dem LaTeX-Typ
-\family typewriter
-Environment
-\family default
- zu, damit Layouts für Theoreme korrekt arbeiten.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float=0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Sensitive
-\family default
-\series default
- ist ein Spezialfall von Bildunterschriften für Gleitobjekte (Abbildungen
- und Tabellen).
-
-\family typewriter
-Sensi\SpecialChar \-
-tive
-\family default
- bedeutet, dass der gedruckte Text von der Art des Gleitobjekts abhängt.
+] Ein zusätzlicher Abstand zwischen Absätzen desselben Layouts.
+ Wenn in einer Umgebung andere Layouts integriert werden, so werden diese
+ mit dem
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParSep
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+ der Umgebung getrennt.
+ Die kompletten Unterpunkte der Umgebung werden jedoch
+\emph on
+zusätzlich
+\emph default
+ mit
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ItemSep
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Counter
-\family default
-\series default
-definiert automatisch nummerierte Zähler, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
+ getrennt.
+ Man beachte, dass
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
-reference "sub:Zähler"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ItemSep
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- beschrieben.
+ein
+\emph on
+Multiplikator
+\emph default
+ ist
+\emph on
+.
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+ItemTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-Note that this will completely override any prior
+ [[FIXME]] (Wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.)
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+KeepEmpty
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- declaration for this style.
- Must end with
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-EndLangPreamble
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
+] Normalerweise ist es in LyX nicht möglich, einen Absatz leer zu lassen,
+ da das zu einer leeren LaTeX-Ausgabe führen würde.
+ In manchen Fällen ist das aber durchaus gewünscht: So können beispielsweise
+ in einer Briefvorlage die benötigten Felder leer voreingestellt werden,
+ damit keiner vergisst, sie anzugeben; in speziellen Klassen wird ein Absatz
+ als Unterbrechung verwendet, der keinen Text enthält.
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-.
- See section
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:I18n"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelBottomsep
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- for details on its use.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float=0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+] Der vertikale Abstand zwischen der Marke und dem folgenden Text.
+ Wird nur für Marken benutzt, die über dem folgenden Text stehen (
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Top_Environment
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LatexName
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ und
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Centered_Top_Environment
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Der Name, den LaTeX für dieses Layout wählt, das heißt entweder der Name
- eines LaTeX-Befehls oder der einer LaTeX-Umgebung.
+).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LatexParam
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelCounter
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Ein optionaler Parameter, der
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LatexName
-\family default
-\series default
- (dem zugehörigen Befehl oder der Umgebung) übergeben wird.
- Dieser Parameter kann innerhalb von LyX nicht mehr geändert werden.
-
-\end_layout
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string=""
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LatexType
-\family default
-\series default
- [
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-Paragraph
-\emph default
-, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-List_Environment
-\family default
-]
+] ist der Name des Zählers zur automatischen Nummerierung.
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Legt fest, wie das Layout in LaTeX überführt wird.
-
+Er
+\emph on
+muss
+\emph default
+ angegeben werden, wenn
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelType
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Paragraph
-\family default
-\series default
- bewirkt nichts besonderes -- der Text wird als
-\emph on
-normaler
-\emph default
-
-\emph on
-Absatz
-\emph default
- übernommen.
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Counter
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Command
-\family default
-\series default
- behandelt den Text als Argument eines LaTeX-Befehls (
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
+ ist.
+ In diesem Fall wird der Zähler jedes mal erhöht, wenn das entsprechende
+ Layout im Dokument verwendet wird.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-LatexBe\SpecialChar \-
-fehl
+Er
+\emph on
+kann
\emph default
- {\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\family default
-).
+ angegeben werden, wenn
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelType
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Environment
-\family default
-\series default
- behandelt den Text als Kern einer LaTeX-Umgebung
-\begin_inset Foot
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LaTeX-Umgebung und LaTeX-Befehl sind hier etwas irreführend, denn diese
- Regeln gelten auch für SGML-Klassen.
- Schauen Sie sich am besten die SGML-Klassen-Dateien für Beispiele an.
+Enumerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+ ist.
+ In diesem Fall ist es etwas kompliziert: Angenommen Sie haben
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-(
-\family typewriter
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexUmgebung
-\emph default
-} \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
-LatexUmgebung
-\emph default
-}
-\family default
-).
-
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelCounter MeinZaehler
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Item_Environment
-\family default
-\series default
- bewirkt dasselbe wie
-\family typewriter
-Environment
-\family default
-, nur dass vor jedem Absatz ein
-\family typewriter
-\backslash
-item
-\family default
- eingefügt wird.
-
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
+ angegeben, dann lauten die eigentlichen Zähler
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-List_Environment
-\family default
-\series default
- funktioniert wie
-\family typewriter
-Item_Environment
-\family default
-, nur dass
-\family typewriter
- Label\SpecialChar \-
-Width\SpecialChar \-
-String
-\family default
- als Argument an die Umgebung übergeben wird.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MeinZaehleri
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
- Label\SpecialChar \-
-WidthString
-\family default
- kann im Menü
-\family sans
-Absatz-Einstellungen
-\family default
- (
-\family sans
-Bearbeiten
-\family default
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+\end_inset
-\family sans
-Absatz-Einstellungen
-\family default
-
-\begin_inset Marginal
-status open
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Graphics
- filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
- BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
+MeinZaehlerii
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MeinZaehleriii
\end_layout
\end_inset
- definiert werden.
+ und
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\emph on
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MeinZaehleriv
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-Fasst man die letzten Sachen zusammen, wird die LaTeX-Ausgabe entweder so:
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+; so wie in LaTeX.
+ Diese Zähler müssen alle separat deklariert werden.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-latexname[latexparam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\end_layout
+Siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-oder so:
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Zähler"
-\backslash
-begin{latexname}[latexparam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{latexname}.
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-aussehen, abhängig vom LaTeX-Typ.
+ für Einzelheiten zu Zählern.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelFont
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LeftMargin
-\family default
-\series default
- [
-\family typewriter
-string=""
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Definiert den linken Einzug.
- Wenn ein Layout in ein anderes
-\family typewriter
-Environment
-\family default
--Layout integriert wird, werden die Breiten der verschiedenen
-\family typewriter
-LeftMargin
-\family default
-s nicht einfach addiert, sondern vorher in Abhängigkeit zur Schachtelungstiefe
- mit dem Faktor
-\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{Tiefe}+4}$
+ Der Zeichensatz, der für die Marke verwendet wird.
+ Siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
- multipliziert.
- Dieser Parameter wird auch dann benutzt, wenn der Rand als
-\family typewriter
-Manual
-\family default
- oder
-\family typewriter
-Dynamic
-\family default
- definiert wurde.
- In diesem Fall wird der Wert zu den gegebenen manuellen oder dynamischen
- Rändern hinzugefügt.
- Für die Bedeutung des Wertes gilt das bei
-\family typewriter
-ParIndent
-\family default
- Gesagte.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Margin
-\family default
-\series default
- [
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-Static
-\emph default
-, Manual, Dynamic, First_Dynamic, Right_Address_Box
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-legt fest, wie der linke Rand des Textes bestimmt wird.
-
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Static
-\family default
-\series default
- wählt feste Randbreiten.
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelIndent
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Manual
-\family default
-\series default
- bedeutet, dass der Rand von der Einstellung der
-\family sans
-Ausrichtung
-\family default
- im Menü
-\family sans
-Absatz-Einstellungen
-\family default
- (
-\family sans
-Bearbeiten
-\family default
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family sans
-Absatz-Einstellungen
-\family default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string=""
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Marginal
-status open
+\end_inset
+
+] Text der angibt, wie weit die Marke eingerückt werden soll.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Graphics
- filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
- BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
+Labelsep
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) abhängt.
- Dies wird für hübsche Listen ohne Tabulatoren benutzt.
-
+] Text der den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Marke und dem folgenden
+ Text angibt.
+ Wird nur für Marken benutzt, die nicht über dem folgenden Text stehen.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Dynamic
-\family default
-\series default
- bedeutet, der linke Rand hängt von der Größe der verwendeten Markierung
- ab.
- Dies wird zum Beispiel bei automatisch nummerierten Überschriften verwendet.
- Es leuchtet ein, dass die Überschrift
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-5.4.3.2.1 Sehr lange \SpecialChar \ldots{}
- Überschrift
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
+\end_layout
- einen größeren linken Rand benötigt, als
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-3.2 Sehr lange \SpecialChar \ldots{}
- Überschrift
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-.
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string=""
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-First_Dynamic
-\family default
-\series default
- arbeitet ähnlich wie
-\family typewriter
-Dynamic
-\family default
-, aber nur die erste Zeile wird dynamisch gesetzt, die anderen statisch.
- Dies wird für die LaTeX
-\begin_inset ERT
+] Der String, der für den
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-"=
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-Umgebung
-\family sans
-description
-\family default
- benutzt.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Right_Address_Box
-\family default
-\series default
- bedeutet, dass der Rand wird so gewählt, dass die längste Zeile des Absatzes
- gerade den rechten Rand berührt.
- Dies wird zum Setzen einer Adresse am rechten Rand der Seite eingesetzt.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Static
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-NeedProtect
-\family default
-\series default
+ verwendet wird.
+ Wenn
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelCounter
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\series medium
-[
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-0
-\emph default
-,1
-\family default
-]
-\series default
-
+ gesetzt wurde, kann der String spezielle Formatierungsbefehle enthalten,
+ wie sie in Abschnitt
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Zähler"
-Gibt an, ob
-\emph on
-zerbrechliche
-\emph default
- LaTeX-Befehle innerhalb dieses Layouts durch
-\family typewriter
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-protect
-\family default
- ge\SpecialChar \-
-schützt werden müssen.
+ be\SpecialChar \-
+schrieben sind.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Newline
-\family default
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelStringAppendix
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\series medium
-[
-\family typewriter
-0,
-\emph on
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string=""
+\end_layout
-1
-\family default
-\emph default
-]
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+] wird im Anhang anstatt
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
+\end_layout
-Gibt an, ob Zeilenumbrüche in LaTeX als
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
+ benutzt.
+ Beachten Sie, dass jede Definition von
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
+\end_layout
-\backslash
+\end_inset
-\backslash
+ auch
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelStringAppendix
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
- dargestellt werden, oder nicht.
- Es macht Sinn, diese Option auszuschalten (Wert: 0), um LaTeX-Einschübe
- in LyX komfortabler editieren zu können.
+ zurücksetzt.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-NextNoIndent
-\family default
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelTag
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [FIXME] (Wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.)
+\end_layout
-\series medium
-[
-\family typewriter
-1,
-\emph on
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelType
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-0
-\family default
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+No_Label
\emph default
-]
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
+Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Gibt an, ob der nachfolgende Absatz einen linken Einzug haben darf oder
- nicht.
-
-\family typewriter
-1
-\family default
- heißt, der Absatz erhält auf keinen Fall einen Einzug.
- (Zum Beispiel nach einer Überschrift.)
+Itemize, Bibliography
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
\end_layout
+\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-ObsoletedBy
-\family default
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Manual
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ bedeutet: die Marke ist das erste Wort (bis zum ersten echten Leerzeichen).
+ Verwenden Sie geschützte Leerzeichen wenn Sie mehr als ein Wort als Marke
+ haben wollen.
-\begin_inset space ~
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Static
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+ bedeutet: die Marke ist was als
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ist der Name eines Layouts, das durch dieses ersetzt wurde.
- So können Sie ein Layout umbenennen und die Rückwärtskompatibilität erhalten.
+ definiert wurde.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Top_Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-OptionalArgs
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-[int=0]
-\family default
-\series default
-
+und
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-ist die Zahl der optionalen Argumente, die in diesem Layout benutzt werden
- können.
- Dies ist zum Beispiel bei Abschnittsüberschriften hilfreich und macht nur
- mit LaTeX Sinn.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Centered_Top_Environment
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+ sind Spezialfälle von
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
-\series medium
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\series medium
-ParbreakIsNewline
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\series default
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+.
+ Die Marke erscheint über dem Absatz, aber nur am Anfang der Umgebung oder
+ am Anfang einer Serie von Absätzen mit diesem Layout.
+ Dies benutzt man zum Beispiel im
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+Abstract
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+-Layout.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Sensitive
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-Indicates that paragraphs will not be separated by an empty line in LaTeX
- output, but only by a line break; together with
+ ist ein Spezialfall für die Bildunterschriftsmarken für Abbildungen und
+ Tabellen-Gleitobjekte.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-PassThru 1
+Sensitive
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, this allows to emulate a plain text editor (like the ERT inset).
+ bedeutet, dass der gedruckte Text von der Art des Gleitobjekts abhängt:
+ Er ist fest einprogrammiert als 'GleitobjektTyp N', wobei N der Wert des
+ Zählers des Gleitobjekttyps ist.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-ParIndent
-\family default
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Counter
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ definiert automatisch nummerierte Zähler.
+ Der
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
+\end_layout
-\series medium
-[
-\family typewriter
-string=""
-\family default
-]
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ wird erweitert, damit er alle
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Counter
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Der Einzug der ersten Zeile eines Absatzes.
- Als Argument wird eine Zeichenkette übergeben.
- Zum Beispiel bedeutet
+ enthält: Das Ergebnis wird demnach zum Beispiel
\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-MM
-\family default
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Abschnitt
+\backslash
+thechapter.
+\backslash
+thesection
+\end_layout
-, dass die erste Zeile genau so weit eingezogen wird, wie die Breite von
-
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-MM
-\family default
-
\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
- im normalen Zeichensatz ist.
- Einen negativen Wert können Sie angeben, indem Sie ein
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
+ sein.
+ Siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
--
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
- voranstellen.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Zähler"
-Diese Methode wurde gewählt, damit das Aussehen auf dem Bildschirm bei unterschi
-edlichen Zeichensätzen möglichst ähnlich bleibt.
-
-\family typewriter
-ParIndent
-\family default
- bleibt für ein bestimmtes Layout fest.
- Eine Ausnahme ist das Standard-Layout, denn dort kann der Einzug vom vorherigen
- Layout mit
-\family typewriter
-NextNoIndent
-\family default
- verboten werden.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Auch benutzt das Standard-Layout innerhalb von Umgebungen den Einzug der
- Umgebung und nicht den eigenen.
- Zum Beispiel haben Standardabsätze innerhalb einer Aufzählung keinen Einzug.
+ für weitere Informationen über Zähler.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-ParSep
-\family default
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Enumerate
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-
-\series medium
-[
-\family typewriter
-float=0
-\family default
-]
-\series default
-
+ erzeugt die üblichen Marken für Nummerierungen.
+ Momentan sind diese fest auf arabische Zahlen, Kleinbuchstaben, kleine
+ römische Zahlen und Großbuchstaben (für die 4
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Der vertikale Anstand zwischen den Absätzen dieses Layouts.
-\end_layout
+möglichen Schachtelungstiefen) programmiert.
+\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-ParSkip
-\family default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Itemize
+\end_layout
-[
-\family typewriter
-float=0
-\family default
-]
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ erzeugt je nach Schachtelungsebene verschiedene Auflistungszeichen, Diese
+ sind ebenfalls fest programmiert.
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-LyX erlaubt im Menü
-\family sans
-Dokument
-\family default
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family sans
-Einstellungen
-\family default
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Bibliography
+\end_layout
-\family sans
-Textformat
-\family default
- die Einstellung
-\family sans
-Absätze
-\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-trennen
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
+ wird intern von LyX verwendet und sollte nur zusammen mit
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-durch
-\family default
-.
- Mögliche Einstellungen sind entweder
-\family sans
-Einrü\SpecialChar \-
-ckung
-\family default
- oder
-\family sans
-Vertikaler
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType BibEnvironment
+\end_layout
-Abstand
-\family default
-.
- Wenn
-\family sans
-Vertikaler
-\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-Abstand
-\family default
- gewählt wird, wird in einem Layout mit
-\family typewriter
-Latex\SpecialChar \-
-Type Paragraph
-\family default
- der Wert von
-\family typewriter
-ParIndent
-\family default
- ignoriert.
- Stattdessen werden alle Absätze durch einen vertikalen Abstand getrennt.
- Die Länge dieses Abstands ist das Produkt von
-\family typewriter
-ParSkip
-\family default
- und der Höhe des Standardzeichensatzes.
+ verwendet werden.
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-PassThru
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ Beachten Sie, dass dies alle vorhergehenden
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
-\series medium
-[0,
-\series default
- 1]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+-Deklaration für diesen Stil überschreibt.
+ Muss mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-\family default
-Legt fest, ob der Absatzinhalt unverändert ausgegeben werden soll, also
- ohne diverse von LaTeX benötigte Ersetzungen durchzuführen.
- Dies ersetzt in gewisser Weise das alte Zeichensatzattribut
-\family typewriter
-LaTe
-\begin_inset ERT
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-{}
+EndLangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-X
-\family default
-.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Preamble\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-EndPreamble
-\family default
-\series default
-
+ beendet werden.
+ Siehe Abschnitt
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:I18n"
-Eine Serie von Makrodefinitionen, die in die Präambel (vor
-\family typewriter
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-begin{docu\SpecialChar \-
-ment}
-\family default
-) eingefügt werden, falls dieses Layout benutzt wird.
+ für Details zur Verwendung.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\series medium
-RefPrefix
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+<Name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-The prefix to use when creating labels referring to paragraphs of this type.
- This allows the use of formatted references.
+] Der LaTeX-Name für dieses Layout.
+ Das bedeutet entweder der Name eines LaTeX-Befehls oder der einer LaTeX-Umgebun
+g.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\series medium
-RequiredArgs
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-int=0
+<Parameter>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-The number of required arguments that the LaTeX command or environment correspon
-ding to this style expects.
- In the case of a command, these are required arguments
-\emph on
-other than
-\emph default
- that associated with the content of the paragraph itself.
- These do not actually have to be provided: LyX will output empty arguments
- if necessary.
- Note that optional arguments will be output before required arguments.
- See the discussion of the
+] Ein optionaler Parameter für den entsprechenden
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-OptionalArgs
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tag above for more information.
+.
+ Dieser Parameter kann innerhalb von LyX nicht mehr geändert werden.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Requires
-\family default
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\series medium
-[
-\family typewriter
-string
-\family default
-]
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\emph on
+Paragraph
+\emph default
+, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
+List_Environment, Bib_Environment
+\end_layout
-\series medium
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "Requires-2"
+] Legt fest, wie das Layout in LaTeX übersetzt wird.
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
+\end_layout
-\series default
-legt fest, dass das Layout die Funktion
-\family typewriter
-string
-\family default
- benötigt.
- Sehen Sie sich auch die Beschreibung von
-\family typewriter
-Provides
-\family default
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vpageref
-reference "Provides"
+ mag irreführend sein, denn dessen Regeln gelten auch für SGML-Klassen.
+ Siehe die SGML Klassendateien für spezielle Beispiele.
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- an.
+
\end_layout
+\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-RightMargin
-\family default
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Paragraph
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-
-\series medium
-[
-\family typewriter
-string=""
-\family default
-]
-\series default
+ bewirkt nichts besonderes -- der Text wird als
+\emph on
+normaler
+\emph default
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+Absatz
+\emph default
+ übernommen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Command
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
+ behandelt den Text als Argument eines LaTeX-Befehls
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Ähnlich wie
-\family typewriter
-LeftMargin
-\family default
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Spacing
-\family default
-\series default
+(
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\backslash
-\series medium
-[
-\family typewriter
\emph on
-single
+LatexName
\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+}
+\end_layout
-onehalf,
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-double,
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+).
+\end_layout
-other
-\family default
-\emph on
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Environment
+\end_layout
-Wert
-\emph default
-]
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-
+ behandelt den Text als Kern einer LaTeX-Umgebung
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Dies definiert die Voreinstellung für den Zeilenabstand des Layouts.
- Die Argumente
-\family typewriter
-single
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-onehalf
-\family default
- und
-\family typewriter
-double
-\family default
- entsprechen Multiplikatoren 1, 1.25 und 1.667.
- Wenn Sie als Argument
-\family typewriter
-other
-\family default
- angeben, müssen Sie als
+(
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+begin{
\emph on
-Wert
+LatexName
\emph default
- einen konkreten Multiplikator angeben.
- Im Gegensatz zu anderen Parametern erzeugt LyX, wenn
-\family typewriter
-Spacing
-\family default
- gesetzt wird, spezifischen LaTeX-Code, der auf das Paket
-\family typewriter
-setspace.sty
-\family default
- zurückgreift.
+}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\backslash
+end{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\series medium
-Spellcheck
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ bewirkt dasselbe wie
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+, nur dass vor jedem Absatz ein
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\backslash
+item
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-Spellcheck paragraphs of this style.
- Default is true.
+ eingefügt wird.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+List_Environment
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-TextFont
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ funktioniert wie
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Item_Environment
+\end_layout
-Der Zeichensatz, der für den Textkörper verwendet wird.
- (Siehe auch Abschnitt
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+\end_inset
+, nur dass
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-.)
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-TocLevel
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelWidthString
+\end_layout
-[int]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-
+ als Argument an die Umgebung übergeben wird.
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ist die Stufe des Stils im Inhaltsverzeichnis und wird zur automatischen
- Nummerierung von Abschnittsüberschriften benutzt.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-TopSep
-\family default
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelWidthString
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ kann im Menü
+\family sans
+Bearbeiten
+\family default
+\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-\series medium
-[
-\family typewriter
-float=0
+\family sans
+Absatz-Einstellungen
\family default
-]
-\series default
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Marginal
+status open
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_inset Graphics
+ filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
+ BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Der vertikale Abstand, der die erste Serie von Absätzen vom vorangehenden
- Text trennt.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:I18n"
-
-\end_inset
-Internationalization of Paragraph Styles
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-LyX has long supported internationalization of layout information, but,
- until version 2.0, this applied only to the user interface and not to, say,
- PDF output.
- Thus, French authors were forced to resort to ugly hacks if they wanted
- `
-\lang french
-Théorème
-\lang english
- 1' instead of `Theorem 1'.
- Thanks to Georg Baum, that is no longer the case.
+ definiert werden.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-If a
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Style
+Bib_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- defines text that is to appear in the typeset document, it may use
+ ist wie
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-BabelPreamble
-\end_layout
-
+ aber fügt zusätzlich das notwendige Argument zum Begin-Befehl der Bibliography-
+Umgebung ein:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
- to support non-English and even multi-language documents correctly.
- The following excerpt (from the
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-theorems-ams.inc
+\backslash
+begin{thebibliography}{99}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- file) shows how this works:
+ Es ist daher nur für die Bibliography-Umgebung nützlich.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Preamble
+\begin_layout Standard
+Fasst man die letzten Sachen zusammen, wird die LaTeX-Ausgabe entweder so:
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
+
\backslash
-theoremstyle{remark}
+LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-newtheorem{claim}[thm]{
-\backslash
-protect
-\backslash
-claimname}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndPreamble
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-LangPreamble
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-providecommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{_(Claim)}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndLangPreamble
+\begin_layout Standard
+oder so:
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-BabelPreamble
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-addto
\backslash
-captions$$lang{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
+begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
\backslash
-claimname}{_(Claim)}}
+end{LatexName}.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndBabelPreamble
+\begin_layout Standard
+aussehen, abhängig vom LaTeX-Typ.
\end_layout
\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-In principle, any legal LaTeX may appear in the
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-BabelPreamble
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tags, but in practice they will typically look as they do here.
- The key to correct translation of the typeset text is the definition of
- the LaTeX command
+] Wenn ein Layout in ein anderes Layout für Umgebungen eingefügt wird, werden
+ die Breiten der verschiedenen
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-claimname
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and its use in
+ nicht einfach addiert, sondern vorher in Abhängigkeit zur Schachtelungstiefe
+ mit dem Faktor
+\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{Tiefe}+4}$
+\end_inset
+
+ multipliziert.
+ Dieser Parameter wird auch dann benutzt, wenn
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-newtheorem
+Margin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-The
+ als
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tag provides for internationalization based upon the overall language of
- the document.
- The contents of the tag will be included in the preamble, just as with
- the
+ oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Preamble
+Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tag.
- What makes it special is the use of the
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+ definiert wurde.
+ In diesem Fall wird der Wert zu den gegebenen manuellen oder dynamischen
+ Rändern hinzugefügt.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-function
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+Zum Beispiel bedeutet
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-_()
+MM
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, which will be replaced, when LyX produces LaTeX output, with the translation
- of its argument into the document language.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-The
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-BabelPreamble
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+, dass der Absatz mit der Breite eingerückt wird, die die Buchstaben
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
- tag is more complex, since it is meant to provide support for multi-language
- documents and so offers an interface to the
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-babel
+MM
\end_layout
\end_inset
- package.
- Its contents will be added to the preamble once for each language that
- appears in the document.
- In this case, the argument to
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-_()
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+ in der normalen Schriftart haben.
+ man kann negative Breite erzeugen, indem man den String mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
- will be replaced with its translation into the language in question; the
- expression
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$lang
+-
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is replaced by the language name (as used by the babel package).
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-A German document that also included a French section would thus have the
- following in the preamble:
+ beginnt.
+ Diese Art der Angabe wurde gewählt, damit der Text unabhängig von der verwendet
+en Bildschirmschriftart wie vorgesehen aussieht.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captionsfrench{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Affirmation}}
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captionsngerman{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}}
-\backslash
-providecommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Margin
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-LaTeX and
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-babel
+\emph on
+Static
+\emph default
+, Manual, Dynamic, First_Dynamic, Right_Address_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
- will then conspire to produce the correct text in the output.
-\end_layout
+]
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
+legt fest, wie der linke Rand des Textes bestimmt wird.
+
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-One important point to note here is that the translations are provided by
- LyX itself, through the same mechanism it uses for internationalization
- of the user interface.
- This means, in effect, that
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+ wählt feste Randbreiten.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-BabelPreamble
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
- are really only of use in layout files that are provided with LyX, since
- text entered in user-created layout files will not be seen by LyX's internation
-alization routines.
- That said, however, any layout created with the intention that it will
- be included with LyX should use these tags where appropriate.
-\end_layout
+ bedeutet, dass der Rand von der Einstellung der
+\family sans
+Ausrichtung
+\family default
+ im Menü
+\family sans
+Absatz-Einstellungen
+\family default
+ (
+\family sans
+Bearbeiten
+\family default
+\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Gleitobjekte
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Gleitobjekte"
+\family sans
+Absatz-Einstellungen
+\family default
+
+\begin_inset Marginal
+status open
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_inset Graphics
+ filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
+ BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
\end_inset
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Seit LyX 1.3.0 ist es möglich und nötig, Gleitobjekte (
-\family sans
-Abbildung
-\family default
-,
-\family sans
-Tabelle
-\family default
-,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-) in der Textklasse selber zu definieren.
- Standardgleitobjekte sind in der Datei
-\family typewriter
-stdfloats.inc
-\family default
- enthalten, so dass Sie sie nur noch
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Input stdfloats.inc
+) abhängt.
+ Dies wird für hübsche Listen ohne Tabulatoren benutzt.
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-zu Ihrer Layoutdatei hinzufügen müssen.
- Wenn Sie eine Textklasse implementieren wollen, die andere Gleitobjekttypen
- enthält (wie zum Beispiel die AGU-Klasse), werden Ihnen die folgenden Informati
-onen helfen:
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Dynamic
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Extension
-\begin_inset space ~
+ bedeutet, der linke Rand hängt von der Größe der verwendeten Markierung
+ ab.
+ Dies wird zum Beispiel bei automatisch nummerierten Überschriften verwendet.
+ Es leuchtet ein, dass die Überschrift
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-[string=""]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+5.4.3.2.1 Sehr lange \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+ Überschrift
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
+ einen größeren linken Rand benötigt, als
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+3.2 Sehr lange \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+ Überschrift
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
-Die Dateinamenerweiterung einer zusätzlichen Datei für das Abbildungsver\SpecialChar \-
-zeichnis
- (oder andere).
- LaTeX schreibt die Beschriftungen in diese Datei.
+.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-GuiName
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+First_Dynamic
+\end_layout
-[string=""]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ arbeitet ähnlich wie
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Die Zeichenkette, die in den Menüs und für die Beschriftung benutzt wird.
- Dies wird in die aktuelle Sprache übersetzt, wenn babel verwendet wird.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Dynamic
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LaTe
+, aber nur die erste Zeile wird dynamisch gesetzt, die anderen statisch.
+ Dies wird für die LaTeX
\begin_inset ERT
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{}
+"=
\end_layout
\end_inset
-XBuiltin
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+Umgebung
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-[0,
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+description
+\end_layout
-1]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ benutzt.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Right_Address_Box
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-1 bedeutet, das das Gleitobjekt bereits von der LaTeX-Dokumentklasse benutzt
- wird.
- 0 bedeutet, das das Gleitobjekt im LaTeX-Paket
-\family typewriter
-float
-\family default
- definiert wird.
+ bedeutet, dass der Rand so gewählt wird, dass die längste Zeile des Absatzes
+ gerade den rechten Rand berührt.
+ Dies wird zum Setzen einer Adresse am rechten Rand der Seite eingesetzt.
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-ListName
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NeedProtect
+\end_layout
-[string=""]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-Die Überschrift für das Gleitobjekt-Verzeichnis.
- Dies wird in die Dokumentsprache übersetzt.
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-NumberWithin
-\begin_inset space ~
+] Gibt an, ob
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-[string=""]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+zerbrechliche
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
+ LaTeX-Befehle innerhalb dieses Layouts durch
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+protect
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Dieses optionale Argument bestimmt, ob Gleitobjekte dieser Klasse mit der
- Abschnittsnummer dieses Dokuments nummeriert werden.
- Wenn zum Beispiel [string="chapter"] gesetzt ist, werden die Gleitobjekte
- mit den Kapitelnummern nummeriert.
+ geschützt werden müssen.
+ (Achtung: Diese Einstellung sagt nichts darüber aus, ob der Befehl an sich
+ geschützt werden soll.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Placement
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Newline
+\end_layout
-[string=""]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Die Standardplatzierung für die Gleitobjektklasse.
-\family typewriter
-
-\begin_inset Newline linebreak
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-string
-\family default
- sollte die Standard-LaTeX-Werte
-\family typewriter
-t
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-b
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-p
-\family default
- und
-\family typewriter
-h
-\family default
- für oben, unten, Seite und hier enthalten.
-\begin_inset Foot
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Wie in LaTeX ist die Reihenfolge der Buchstaben unerheblich.
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Zusätzlich gibt es den neuen Typ
-\family typewriter
-H
-\family default
-, der mit Gleitobjekt nichts mehr zu tun hat, denn er bedeutet: drucke es
-
-\emph on
-hier
-\emph default
- und nirgendwo sonst.
- Beachten Sie, dass
-\family typewriter
-H
-\family default
- besonders ist und wegen der Implementierungsdetails nicht bei nicht-eingebauten
- Gleitobjekttypen benutzt werden kann.
- Wenn Sie das nicht verstehen, benutzen Sie einfach
-\family typewriter
-"tbp"
-\family default
-.
-\end_layout
+] Gibt an, ob Zeilenumbrüche in LaTeX als
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Style
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-[string=""]
-\family default
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+
+\backslash
+
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
-ist der Gleitobjektstil, wenn er mit
-\family typewriter
+ dargestellt werden, oder nicht.
+ Man kann dies ausschalten (Wert:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\backslash
-newfloat
-\family default
- definiert wird.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+), um TeX-Code in LyX komfortabler editieren zu können.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NextNoIndent
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Type
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-[string=""]
-\family default
-\series default
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ist der
-\emph on
-Typ
-\emph default
- der neuen Gleitobjektklasse, wie Programm oder Algorithmus.
- Nach dem entsprechenden
-\family typewriter
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-newfloat
-\family default
- stehen Befehle wie
-\family typewriter
-\backslash
-be\SpecialChar \-
-gin{program}
-\family default
- oder
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\backslash
-end{algorithm*}
-\family default
- zur Verfügung.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-Anmerkung: Wenn ein Gleitobjekt vom Typ
-\emph on
-type
-\emph default
- definiert wurde, gibt es automatisch einen dazugehörigen Zähler namens
+\end_inset
+
+] Gibt an, ob der nachfolgende Absatz einen linken Einzug haben darf oder
+ nicht.
-\emph on
-type
-\emph default
-.
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Flexible Einfügungen und InsetLayout
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Flexible-Einfügungen-und"
+\end_inset
+ heißt, der Absatz erhält auf keinen Fall einen Einzug (z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+B.
+ nach einer Überschrift), wenn
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+DefaultStyle
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Seit Version 1.4.0 unterstützt LyX Zeichenstile.
- Seit Version 1.6.0 heißen sie Flexible Einfügungen.
+\end_inset
+
+- (normalerweise
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Standard
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Es gibt drei Arten von flexiblen Einfügungen:
+\end_inset
+
+-) Paragraphen einen Einzug haben.
+ (Daher beeinflusst die Einstellung nur
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Standard
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-Zeichenstil (
-\family typewriter
-CharStyle
-\family default
-): diese definieren semantische Textauszeichnungen, die mit LaTeX-Befehlen
- wie
-\family typewriter
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-noun
-\family default
- oder
-\family typewriter
+-Paragraphen.)
+\end_layout
-\backslash
-code
-\family default
- korrespondieren.
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ObsoletedBy
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-benutzerdefiniert (
-\family typewriter
-Custom
-\family default
-): diese können benutzt werden, um benutzer\SpecialChar \-
-de\SpecialChar \-
-fi\SpecialChar \-
-nier\SpecialChar \-
-te einklappbare Einfügungen
- zu definieren, ähnlich wie TeX-Code, Fuß\SpecialChar \-
-no\SpecialChar \-
-te usw.
- Ein naheliegendes Beispiel ist die Endnotiz, die im
-\family typewriter
-endnote
-\family default
--Modul definiert ist.
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Name>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-XML-Element (
-\family sans
-Element
-\family default
-): diese werden mit DocBook-Klassen benutzt.
+\end_inset
+
+] Der Name eines Layouts, das durch dieses ersetzt wurde.
+ So können Sie ein Layout umbenennen und die Rückwärtskompatibilität erhalten.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Flexible Einfügungen werden mit der
-\family typewriter
-InsetLayout
-\family default
--Marke definiert, die weiter unten erklärt wird.
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+OptionalArgs
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Die
-\family typewriter
-InsetLayout
-\family default
--Marke besitzt noch eine andere Funktion: sie kann benutzt werden, um das
- allgemeine Aussehen vieler verschiedener Einfügungstypen anzupassen.
- Zurzeit kann
-\family typewriter
-InsetLayout
-\family default
- benutzt werden, um die Layout-Parameter für Fußnoten, Randnoten, eingefügten
- Noten, TeX-Code (ERT), Zweige, Stichwortverzeichnisse, Boxen, Tabellen,
- Algorithmen, URLs und optionaler Argumente anzupassen, ebenso um flexible
- Einfügungen zu definieren.
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Die
-\family typewriter
-InsetLayout
-\family default
--Definition muss mit folgender Zeile beginnen:
+\end_inset
+
+] Die Zahl der optionalen Argumente, die in diesem Layout benutzt werden
+ können.
+ Dies ist zum Beispiel bei Abschnittsüberschriften hilfreich und macht nur
+ mit LaTeX Sinn.
+ Beachten Sie, dass in der Ausgabe die optionalen Argumente vor den benöigten
+ stehen werden (siehe unten).
+ Man kann also Konstrukte wie dieses hier haben:
\end_layout
+\begin_deeper
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\family typewriter
-InsetLayout <Type>
+\backslash
+mycmd[optional1]{benötigt1}{Inhalt des Paragraphs}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Hier bezeichnet
-\family typewriter
-<Type>
-\family default
- die Einfügung, deren Layout definiert wird.
- Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten.
+aber nicht:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-Das Layout für eine existierende Einfügung wird geändert.
- In diesem Fall kann
-\family typewriter
-<Type>
-\family default
- folgendes sein:
-\family typewriter
-Algorithm
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Branch
-\family default
-, Box,
-\family typewriter
-Box:shaded
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-ERT
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Figure
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Foot
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Index
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Info
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Info:menu
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Info:shortcut
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Info:shortcuts
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Listings
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+mycmd[optional1]{benötigt1}[optional2]{Inhalt des Paragraphs}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+zumindest nicht ohne TeX-Code (in den man alles schreiben kann).
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParbreakIsNewline
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Gibt an, dass ein Paragraph nicht durch eine leere Zeile in der LaTeX-Ausgabe
+ abgesetzt wird, sondern nur duch einen Zeilenumbruch.
+ Zusammen mit
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PassThru 1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ erlaubt dies die Emulation eines reinen Texteditors (so wie die TeX-Code
+ Einfügung).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParIndent
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string=""
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Der Einzug der ersten Zeile eines Absatzes.
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Parindent
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ bleibt für ein bestimmtes Layout fest.
+ Eine Ausnahme ist das Standard-Layout, denn dort kann der Einzug vom vorherigen
+ Layout mit
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NextNoIndent
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ verboten werden.
+ Außerdem benutzt das
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Standard
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+-Layout innerhalb von Umgebungen den
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Parindent
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ der Umgebung und nicht den eigenen.
+ Zum Beispiel haben
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Standard
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+-Absätze innerhalb einer Aufzählung keinen Einzug.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParSep
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float=0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Der vertikale Anstand zwischen den Absätzen dieses Layouts.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Parskip
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float=0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Der Benutzer kann in LyX wählen ob Absätze duch
+\family sans
+Einrückung
\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Marginal
+ oder
+\family sans
+Vertikaler
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+Abstand
\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Note:Comment
+ getrennt werden.
+ Wenn
+\family sans
+Einrückung
\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Note:Note
+ gewählt ist, wird
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Parskip
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ ignoriert.
+ Ist
+\family sans
+Vertikaler
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+Abstand
\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Note:GreyedOut
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-OptArg
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Table
-\family default
- oder
+ gewählt wird
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParIndent
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ ignoriert und alle Absätze durch den vertikalen Abstand von
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Parskip
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ getrennt.
+ Die Länge dieses Abstands berechnet sich mit
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Parskip
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+* DefaultHeight
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ wobei
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+DefaultHeight
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ die Höhe einer Zeile in der normalen Schrift ist.
+ Dadurch bleibt das Aussehen mit verschiedenen Schriften gleich.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PassThru
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
\family typewriter
-URL
+
\family default
+Legt fest, ob der Absatzinhalt unverändert ausgegeben werden soll, also
+ ohne diverse von LaTeX benötigte Ersetzungen durchzuführen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Preamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Befehle und Definitionen, die in die Präambel (vor
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+begin{docu\SpecialChar \-
+ment}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+) eingefügt werden, wenn dieses Layout benutzt wird.
+ Kann verwendet werden um Pakete zu laden, Makros zu definieren usw..
+ Muss mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+EndPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ beendet werden.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+RefPrefix
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Der Präfix, der verwendet werden soll, wenn auf Marken dieses Paragraphs
+ verwiesen wird.
+ Dies erlaubt die Verwendung von Formatierten Querverweisen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+RequiredArgs
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Die Anzahl an benötigten Argumenten, die der LaTeX-Befehl oder die -Umgebung
+ benötigt.
+ Für Befehle sind die benötigte Argumente
+\emph on
+andere
+\emph default
+ als die, die mit dem Inhalt des Absatzes zu tun haben.
+ Diese müssen nicht unbedingt angegeben werden: LyX wird leere Argumente
+ ausgeben, wenn nötig.
+ Beachten Sie, dass die optionalen Argumente vor den benötigten ausgegeben
+ werden.
+ Siehe die obige Diskussion in der Beschreibung von
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+OptionalArgs
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ für weitere Informationen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Requires
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] legt fest, dass das Layout die Funktion
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ benötigt.
+ Siehe die Beschreibung von
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Provides
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ in Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Allgemeine-Parameter-für"
+
+\end_inset
+
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-Das Layout für eine flexible Einfügung wird definiert.
- In diesem Fall kann
-\family typewriter
-<Type>
-\family default
- ein beliebiger gültiger Bezeichner sein, der in keiner existierenden Einfügung
- benutzt wird.
- Beachten Sie, dass die Definition einer flexiblen Einfügung
-\emph on
-auch
-\emph default
- einen
-\family typewriter
-Ly
-\begin_inset ERT
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+RightMargin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string=""
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Ähnlich wie
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LeftMargin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Spacing
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+single
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+onehalf
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+double
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+other
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<Wert>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Dies definiert die Voreinstellung für den Zeilenabstand des Layouts.
+ Die Argumente
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+single
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+onehalf
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ und
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+double
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ entsprechen den Multiplikatoren 1, 1.25 und 1.667.
+ Wenn Sie als Argument
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+other
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ angeben, müssen Sie als
+\emph on
+Wert
+\emph default
+ einen konkreten Multiplikator angeben.
+ Im Gegensatz zu anderen Parametern erzeugt LyX, wenn
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Spacing
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ gesetzt wird, spezifischen LaTeX-Code, der das LaTeX-Paket
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+setspace
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ verwendet.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Spellcheck
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Erlaubt es, den Inhalt des Paragraphs auf Rechtschreibung zu überprüfen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TextFont
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Der Zeichensatz, der für den Textkörper verwendet wird.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TocLevel
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\family typewriter
+
+\family default
+ist die Stufe des Stils im Inhaltsverzeichnis und wird zur automatischen
+ Nummerierung von Abschnittsüberschriften benutzt.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TopSep
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\series medium
+
+\series default
+[
+\family typewriter
+float=0
+\family default
+] Der vertikale Abstand, der die erste Serie von Absätzen vom vorangehenden
+ Text trennt.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:I18n"
+
+\end_inset
+
+Internationalization of Paragraph Styles
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+If a
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Style
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ defines text that is to appear in the typeset document, it may use
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ and
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ to support non-English and even multi-language documents correctly.
+ The following excerpt (from the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+theorems-ams.inc
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ file) shows how this works:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Preamble
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+theoremstyle{remark}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+newtheorem{claim}[thm]{
+\backslash
+protect
+\backslash
+claimname}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+providecommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{_(Claim)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndLangPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captions$$lang{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{_(Claim)}}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndBabelPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+In principle, any legal LaTeX may appear in the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ and
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ tags, but in practice they will typically look as they do here.
+ The key to correct translation of the typeset text is the definition of
+ the LaTeX command
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+claimname
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ and its use in
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+newtheorem
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+The
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ tag provides for internationalization based upon the overall language of
+ the document.
+ The contents of the tag will be included in the preamble, just as with
+ the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Preamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ tag.
+ What makes it special is the use of the
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+function
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+_()
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, which will be replaced, when LyX produces LaTeX output, with the translation
+ of its argument into the document language.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+The
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ tag is more complex, since it is meant to provide support for multi-language
+ documents and so offers an interface to the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+babel
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ package.
+ Its contents will be added to the preamble once for each language that
+ appears in the document.
+ In this case, the argument to
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+_()
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ will be replaced with its translation into the language in question; the
+ expression
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+$$lang
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is replaced by the language name (as used by the babel package).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+A German document that also included a French section would thus have the
+ following in the preamble:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captionsfrench{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Affirmation}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captionsngerman{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Behauptung}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\backslash
+providecommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Behauptung}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+LaTeX and
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+babel
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ will then conspire to produce the correct text in the output.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+One important point to note here is that the translations are provided by
+ LyX itself, through the same mechanism it uses for internationalization
+ of the user interface.
+ This means, in effect, that
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ and
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ are really only of use in layout files that are provided with LyX, since
+ text entered in user-created layout files will not be seen by LyX's internation
+alization routines.
+ That said, however, any layout created with the intention that it will
+ be included with LyX should use these tags where appropriate.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Gleitobjekte
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Gleitobjekte"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Es ist nötig Gleitobjekte (
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Abbildung
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Tabelle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+) in der Textklasse selber zu definieren.
+ Standardgleitobjekte sind in der Datei
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+stdfloats.inc
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ enthalten, so dass Sie sie nur noch
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Input stdfloats.inc
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+zu Ihrer Layoutdatei hinzufügen müssen.
+ Wenn Sie eine Textklasse implementieren wollen, die andere Gleitobjekttypen
+ enthält (wie zum Beispiel die AGU-Klasse), werden Ihnen die folgenden Informati
+onen helfen:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Extension
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\family typewriter
+\series medium
+
+\family default
+\series default
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] Die Dateinamenerweiterung einer zusätzlichen Datei für das Abbildungsver\SpecialChar \-
+zeichn
+is (oder andere).
+ LaTeX schreibt die Beschriftungen in diese Datei.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+GuiName
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] Die Zeichenkette, die in den Menüs und für die Beschriftung benutzt wird.
+ Dies wird in die aktuelle Sprache übersetzt, wenn babel verwendet wird.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTML*
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Diese Tags kontrollieren die XHTML-Ausgabe.
+ Siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+IsPredefined
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Gibt an, ob das Gleitobjekt bereits in der Dokumentklasse definiert ist
+ oder ob das LaTeX-Paket
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ geladen werden muss, um es zu definieren.
+ Die Voreinstellung ist
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, was bedeutet, dass
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ verwendet wird.
+ Es sollte auf
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ gesetzt werden, wenn das Gleitobjekt bereits in der Dokumentklasse definiert
+ ist.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ListCommand
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] Der Befehl der verwendet wird, um eine Liste der Gleitobjekte dieses Typs
+ zu generieren; das `
+\backslash
+' muss weggelassen werden.
+ Der Befehl
+\emph on
+muss
+\emph default
+ angegeben werden, wenn
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+UsesFloatPkg
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ auf
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ gesetzt ist, da es sonst keine Möglichkeit gibt, diesen Befehl zu erstellen.
+ Er wird ignoriert, falls
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+UsesFloatPkg
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ auf
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ gesetzt ist, da es dann eine Möglichkeit gibt.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ListName
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] Die Überschrift für das Gleitobjekt-Verzeichnis (z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+B.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Abbildungsverzeichnis
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+).
+ Sie wird für die Bildschirmmarke in LyX verwendet, von LaTeX für den Titel
+ verwendet und als Titel in der XHTML-Ausgabe.
+ Sie wird in die Dokumentsprache übersetzt.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NumberWithin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] Dieses optionale Argument bestimmt, ob Gleitobjekte dieser Klasse mit
+ der Abschnittsnummer dieses Dokuments nummeriert werden.
+ Wenn zum Beispiel
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NumberWithin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ auf
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+chapter
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ gesetzt ist, werden die Gleitobjekte mit den Kapitelnummern nummeriert.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Placement
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] Die Standardplatzierung für die Gleitobjektklasse.
+
+\family typewriter
+
+\family default
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ sollte die Standard-LaTeX-Werte
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+t
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+b
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+p
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ und
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+h
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ für oben, unten, Seite und hier enthalten.
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Wie in LaTeX ist die Reihenfolge der Buchstaben unerheblich.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Zusätzlich gibt es den neuen Typ
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+H
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, der nicht wirklich für ein Gleitobjekt steht, denn er bedeutet: drucke
+ es
+\emph on
+hier
+\emph default
+ und nirgendwo sonst.
+ Beachten Sie, dass
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+H
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ besonders ist und wegen der Implementierungsdetails nicht bei nicht-eingebauten
+ Gleitobjekttypen benutzt werden kann.
+ Wenn Sie die Platzierung nicht verstehen, benutzen Sie einfach
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+tbp
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+RefPrefix
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Der Präfix, der verwendet werden soll, wenn auf Marken dieser Gleitobjekte
+ verwiesen wird.
+ Dies erlaubt die Verwendung von Formatierten Querverweisen.
+ Man kann den
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+RefPrefix
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ eines kopierten Stils entfernen, indem
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ auf
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+OFF
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ gesetzt wird.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Style
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] ist der Gleitobjektstil, wenn er mit
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+newfloat
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ definiert wird.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Type
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] ist der
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Typ
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ der neuen Gleitobjektklasse, wie z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+B.
+ Programm oder Algorithmus.
+ Nach dem entsprechenden
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+newfloat
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ stehen Befehle wie
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+begin{program}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ oder
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+end{algorithm*}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ zur Verfügung.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+UsesFloatPkg
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Gibt an, ob dieses Gleitobjekt mit Hilfe des LaTeX-Pakets
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ definiert wurde, entweder durch die Dokumentklassen, ein anderes Paket
+ oder durch LyX.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+Anmerkung: Wenn ein Gleitobjekt vom Typ
+\emph on
+type
+\emph default
+ definiert wurde, gibt es automatisch einen dazugehörigen Zähler namens
+
+\emph on
+type
+\emph default
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Flexible Einfügungen und InsetLayout
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Flexible-Einfügungen-und"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Es gibt drei Arten von flexiblen Einfügungen:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+Zeichenstil (
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CharStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+): diese definieren semantische Textauszeichnungen, die mit LaTeX-Befehlen
+ wie
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+noun
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ oder
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+code
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ korrespondieren.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+benutzerdefiniert (
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Custom
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+): diese können benutzt werden, um benutzer\SpecialChar \-
+de\SpecialChar \-
+fi\SpecialChar \-
+nier\SpecialChar \-
+te einklappbare Einfügungen
+ zu definieren, ähnlich wie TeX-Code, Fuß\SpecialChar \-
+no\SpecialChar \-
+te usw.
+ Ein naheliegendes Beispiel ist die Endnotiz, die im
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+endnote
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+-Modul definiert ist.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+XML-Element (
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Element
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+): diese werden mit DocBook-Klassen benutzt.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Flexible Einfügungen werden mit der
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+-Marke definiert, die weiter unten erklärt wird.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Die
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+-Marke besitzt noch eine andere Funktion: sie kann benutzt werden, um das
+ allgemeine Aussehen vieler verschiedener Einfügungstypen anzupassen.
+ Zurzeit kann
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ benutzt werden, um die Layout-Parameter für Fußnoten, Randnoten, eingefügten
+ Noten, TeX-Code (ERT), Zweige, Stichwortverzeichnisse, Boxen, Tabellen,
+ Algorithmen, URLs und optionaler Argumente anzupassen, ebenso um flexible
+ Einfügungen zu definieren.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Die
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+-Definition muss mit folgender Zeile beginnen:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+InsetLayout <Typ>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Hier bezeichnet
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Typ>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ die Einfügung, deren Layout definiert wird.
+ Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+Das Layout für eine existierende Einfügung wird geändert.
+ In diesem Fall kann
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Typ>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ folgendes sein:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Algorithm
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Branch
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Box
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Box:shaded
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ERT
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Figure
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Foot
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Index
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Info
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Info:menu
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Info:shortcut
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Info:shortcuts
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Listings
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Marginal
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Note:Comment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Note:Note
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Note:Greyedout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+OptArg
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Table
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, oder
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+URL
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+Das Layout für eine flexible Einfügung wird definiert.
+ In diesem Fall muss
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Typ>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ in der Form
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Flex:<Name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang ngerman
+ sein, wobei
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Name
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang ngerman
+ ein beliebiger gültiger Bezeichner sein kann, der in keiner anderen existierend
+en Einfügung benutzt wird.
+ Der Bezeichner darf Leerzeichen enthalten, dann muss aber der komplette
+ Typ in Anführungszeichen gesetzt werden.
+ Beachten Sie, dass die Definition einer flexiblen Einfügung
+\emph on
+auch
+\emph default
+ einen
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LyXType
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+-Eintrag enthalten muss, der festlegt welcher Einfügungstyp definiert wird.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Die
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+-Definition kann folgende Einträge enthalten:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+BgColor
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] ist die Hintergrundfarbe der Einfügung.
+ Die gültigen Farbnamen sind in
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+src/ColorCode.h
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ definiert.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ContentAsLabel
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Ob der Inhalt der Einfügung als Marke verwendet werden soll, wenn die
+ Einfügung geschlossen ist.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CopyStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Typ>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Beachten Sie, dass der komplette Typ angegeben werden muss, z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+B.
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CopyStyle Flex:<Name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CustomPars
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] zeigt an, ob der Benutzer den Absatzeinstellungen-Dialog (
+\begin_inset Graphics
+ filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
+ scale 70
+ scaleBeforeRotation
+ BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
+ groupId Icon
+
+\end_inset
+
+) benutzen darf.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Decoration
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ kann
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Classic
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Minimalistic
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, oder
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Conglomerate
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ sein.
+ Es beschreibt den Rendering-Stil für den Einfügungsrahmen und die -knöpfe.
+ Fußnoten benutzen im allgemeinen
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Classic
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, TeX-Code
+\family typewriter
+
+\family default
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Minimalistic
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ und Zeichenstile
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Conglomerate
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Display
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Nur sinnvoll wenn der
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ ist.
+ Gibt an, ob die Umgebung in der Ausgabe abgesetzt erscheint oder in einer
+ Zeile mit dem umgebenden Text.
+ Wenn auf
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ gesetzt, wird angenommen, dass die LaTeX-Umgebung Leerraum nach den
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+begin{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ und
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+end{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Befehlen ignoriert (inklusive des Zeilenumbruchzeichens).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+End
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ beendet die
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+-Definition.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Font
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ wird für den Text
+\emph on
+und
+\emph default
+ die Marke benutzt (siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+
+\end_inset
+
+).
+ Beachten Sie, dass die Definition dieses Fonts automatisch dem
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelFont
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ denselben Wert zuweist, das heißt
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Font
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ muss zuerst definiert werden und
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelFont
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ danach, wenn sie unterschiedlich sein sollen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ForceLTR
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ erzwingt die
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+LaTeX-Sprache
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ und führt zu einer links-nach-rechts-Ausgabe, zum Beispiel bei TeX-Code
+ oder URL.
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ForceLTR
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ ist eine Behelfslösung.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ForcePlain
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] zeigt an, ob stattdessen
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PlainLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ benutzt werden soll oder ob der Benutzer den Absatzstil der Einfügung ändern
+ darf.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+FreeSpacing
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTML*
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Diese Tags kontrollieren die XHTML-Ausgabe.
+ Siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InToc
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Ob der Inhalt der Einfügung für die Zeichenketten des 'Gliederungs'-Fensters
+ verwendet werden soll.
+ Zum Beispiel will man nicht, dass der Inhalt einer Fußzeile im Namen des
+ Abschnitts im Inhaltsverzeichnis des Gliederungs-Fensters erscheint.
+ Aber man will normalerweise, dass der Inhalt von Zeichenstilen erscheint.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+KeepEmpty
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelFont
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ ist die für die Marke benutze Schrift (siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+
+\end_inset
+
+).
+ Beachten Sie, dass diese Definition niemals vor
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Font
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ erscheinen darf, weil sie sonst unwirksam ist.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-{}
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-XType
-\family default
--Eintrag enthalten muss.
-\end_layout
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-Die
-\family typewriter
-InsetLayout
-\family default
--Definition kann folgende Einträge enthalten:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-BGColor
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-ist die Hintergrundfarbe der Einfügung.
- Die gültigen Farben sind in
-\family typewriter
-src/Co\SpecialChar \-
-lorCode.h
-\family default
- definiert.
+] wird auf dem Knopf und anderswo als Einfügungsmarke angezeigt.
+ Einige Einfügungstypen (TeX-Code und Zweig) ändern diese Marke im Vo\SpecialChar \-
+rü\SpecialChar \-
+ber\SpecialChar \-
+gehen.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ContentAsLabel
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+<Name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] ist der Name der LaTeX-Umgebung oder des LaTeX-Befehls.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-Whether to use the content of the inset as the label, when the inset is
- closed.
- Default is false.
-\end_layout
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Parameter>
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-CopyStyle
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+] ist ein optionaler Parameter für den zugehörigen
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Hiermit können Sie alle Optionen eines bereits definierten Layouts in das
- aktuelle kopieren.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexName
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-CustomPars
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-[
-\emph on
-0
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+, einschließ\SpecialChar \-
+lich möglicher Klammerpaare wie
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-1]
-\family default
-\series default
- zeigt an, ob der Benutzer den Absatzeinstellungen-Dialog (
-\begin_inset Graphics
- filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
- scale 70
- scaleBeforeRotation
- BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
- groupId Icon
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+[]
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-) benutzen darf.
+.
+ Dieser Parameter kann in LyX nicht geändert werden.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Decoration
-\family default
-\series default
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
\end_inset
-kann
-\family typewriter
-Classic
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Minimalistic
-\family default
- oder
-\family typewriter
-Conglomerate
-\family default
- sein.
- Es beschreibt den Rendering-Stil für den Einfügungsrahmen und die -knöpfe.
- Fußnoten benutzen im allgemeinen
-\family typewriter
-Classic
-\family default
-, TeX-Code
-\family typewriter
- Minimalistic
-\family default
- und Buchstabenstile
-\family typewriter
-Conglomerate
-\family default
.
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Display
+LyxType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ kann
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+custom
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-Only useful if
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LatexType
+element
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is
+ oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Environment
+end
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Indicates whether the environment will stand on its own in LaTeX output
- or will appear inline with the surrounding text.
- If set to false, it is supposed that the LaTeX environment ignores white
- space (including one newline character) after the
+ (zeigt das Ende einer Definition an) sein.
+ Dieser Eintrag wird für flexible Einfügungen benötigt und ist nur dort
+ sinnvoll.
+ Neben anderen Dingen legt er fest, in welchem Menü diese Einfügung erscheinen
+ wird.
+ Wird
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+LyXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+ auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+charstyle
+\end_layout
-\lang english
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+ gesetzt, wird
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tags.
- Default is true.
+ automatisch auf
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-End
-\family default
-\series default
+ gesetzt.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MultiPar
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-beendet die
-\family typewriter
-InsetLayout
-\family default
--Definition.
-\end_layout
+ kann auf
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Font
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ für
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+charstyle
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-wird für den Text
+-Einfügungen gesetzt werden, indem es
\emph on
-und
+nach
\emph default
- die Marke benutzt (siehe
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+ dem
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LyXType
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
- Beachten Sie, dass die Definition dieses Fonts automatisch dem
-\family typewriter
-LabelFont
-\family default
- denselben Wert zuweist, das heißt
-\family typewriter
-Font
-\family default
- muss zuerst definiert werden und
-\family typewriter
-LabelFont
-\family default
- danach, wenn sie unterschiedlich sein sollen.
+ spezifiziert wird.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MultiPar
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-ForceLTR
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-erzwingt die
\emph on
-latex
-\emph default
--Sprache und führt zu einer links-nach-rechts-Ausgabe (latin), zum Beispiel
- bei TeX-Code oder URL.
- Es ist eine Behelfslösung.
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-ForcePlain
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-[
-\emph on
-0
-\emph default
,
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-1]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-zeigt an, ob PlainLayout benutzt werden soll oder ob der Benutzer den Absatzstil
- der Einfügung ändern darf.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-FreeSpacing
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+] zeigt an, ob in dieser Einfügung mehrfache Absätze erlaubt sind.
+ Dadurch wird
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Normalerweise erlaubt es LyX nicht, mehr als ein Leerzeichen zwischen Wörtern
- einzufügen.
- Diese Eigenschaft kann in bestimmten Fällen umständ\SpecialChar \-
-lich sein, zum Beispiel,
- wenn ein Programmcode eingegeben werden soll.
- In solchen Fällen kann
-\family typewriter
-FreeSpacing
-\family default
- auf
-\family typewriter
-1
-\family default
- gesetzt werden.
- LyX erzeugt in diesem Fall für jedes zusätzliche Leerzeichen ein geschütztes
- Leerzeichen, es sei denn, LyX befindet sich im LaTeX-Modus.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CustomPars
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+ auf denselben Wert gesetzt und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+ForcePlain
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ auf den anderen.
+ Diese können auf andere Werte gesetzt werden, wenn sie
+\emph on
+nach
+\emph default
-\lang english
-These tags control XHTML output.
- See section
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MultiPar
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ benutzt werden.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InToc
+NeedProtect
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-Whether to include the contents of this inset in the strings generated for
- the `Outline' pane.
- One would not, for example, want the content of a footnote in a section
- header to be included in the TOC displayed in the outline, but one would
- normally want the content of a character style displayed.
- Default is false: not to include.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] zeigt an, ob
+\emph on
+zerbrechliche
+\emph default
+ Befehle in diesem Layout ge\SpecialChar \-
+schützt (
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-KeepEmpty
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\backslash
+protect
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Normalerweise ist es in LyX nicht möglich, einen Absatz leer zu lassen,
- da das zu einer leeren LaTeX-Ausgabe führen würde.
- In manchen Fällen ist das aber durchaus gewünscht: So können beispielsweise
- in einer Briefvorlage die benötigten Felder leer voreingestellt werden,
- damit keiner vergisst, sie anzugeben.
- In anderen Klassen wird ein solcher Absatz als Unterbrechung verwendet,
- die keinen eigentlichen Text enthält.
+) werden sollen.
+ Es zeigt
+\emph on
+nicht
+\emph default
+ an, ob der Befehl selber geschützt werden soll.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelFont
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-ist der für die Marke benutze Font (siehe
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
-
-\end_inset
-
-).
- Beachten Sie, dass diese Definition niemals vor
-\family typewriter
-Font
-\family default
- erscheinen darf, weil sie sonst unwirksam ist.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelString
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-wird auf dem Knopf und anderswo als Einfügungsmarke angezeigt.
- Einige Einfügungstypen (TeX-Code und Zweig) ändern diese Marke im Vo\SpecialChar \-
-rü\SpecialChar \-
-ber\SpecialChar \-
-gehen.
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LatexName
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-ist der Name des zugehörigen LaTeX-Stoffes, entweder der Umgebungs- oder
- Befehlsname.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LatexParam
-\family default
-\series default
-
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
\end_inset
-ist ein optionaler Parameter für den zugehörigen
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LatexName
-\family default
-\series default
--Stoff, einschließ\SpecialChar \-
-lich möglicher Klammerpaare wie
-\family typewriter
-[]
-\family default
.
- Dieser Parameter kann in LyX nicht geändert werden.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PassThru
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LatexType
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[
-\family typewriter
\emph on
-Paragraph
-\emph default
-, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+0
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-List_Environment
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-Legt fest, wie das Layout in LaTeX überführt wird.
-
-\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Paragraph
-\family default
-\series default
- bewirkt nichts besonderes -- der Text wird als
-\emph on
-normaler
-\emph default
-
-\emph on
-Absatz
-\emph default
- übernommen.
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Command
-\family default
-\series default
- behandelt den Text als Argument eines LaTeX-Befehls (
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-LatexBe\SpecialChar \-
-fehl
-\emph default
- {\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\family default
-).
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Environment
-\family default
-\series default
- behandelt den Text als Kern einer LaTeX-Umgebung
-\begin_inset Foot
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LaTeX-Umgebung und LaTeX-Befehl sind hier etwas irreführend, denn diese
- Regeln gelten auch für SGML-Klassen.
- Schauen Sie sich am besten die SGML-Klassen-Dateien für Beispiele an.
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+ Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-(
-\family typewriter
-
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexUmgebung
-\emph default
-} \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
-LatexUmgebung
-\emph default
-}
-\family default
-).
-
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Item_Environment
-\family default
-\series default
- bewirkt dasselbe wie
-\family typewriter
-Environment
-\family default
-, nur dass vor jedem Absatz ein
-\family typewriter
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-item
-\family default
- eingefügt wird.
-
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-List_Environment
-\family default
-\series default
- funktioniert wie
-\family typewriter
-Item_Environment
-\family default
-, nur dass
-\family typewriter
- Label\SpecialChar \-
-Width\SpecialChar \-
-String
-\family default
- als Argument an die Umgebung übergeben wird.
-
-\family typewriter
- Label\SpecialChar \-
-WidthString
-\family default
- kann im Menü
-\family sans
-Absatz-Einstellungen
-\family default
- (
-\family sans
-Bearbeiten
-\family default
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-
-\family sans
-Absatz-Einstellungen
-\family default
-
-\begin_inset Marginal
-status open
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Graphics
- filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
- BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
+RefPrefix
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- definiert werden.
+] Der Präfix, der verwendet werden soll, wenn auf Marken dieser Einfügung
+ verwiesen wird.
+ Dies erlaubt die Verwendung von Formatierten Querverweisen.
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LyxType
-\family default
-\series default
- kann die Werte
-\family typewriter
-charstyle
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-custom
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-element
-\family default
- oder
-\family typewriter
-end
-\family default
- (zeigt das Ende einer Definition an).
- Dieser Eintrag wird für flexible Einfügungen benötigt und ist nur dort
- sinnvoll.
- Neben anderen Dingen legt er fest, in welchem Menü diese Einfügung erscheinen
- wird.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Requires
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-MultiPar
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-[
-\emph on
-0
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-1]
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-zeigt an, ob in dieser Einfügung mehrfache Absätze erlaubt sind.
- Dadurch wird
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-CustomPars
-\family default
-\series default
- auf denselben Wert gesetzt und
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-ForcePlain
-\family default
-\series default
- auf den anderen.
- Diese können auf andere Werte gesetzt werden, wenn sie
-\emph on
-nach
-\emph default
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Multi\SpecialChar \-
-Par
-\family default
-\series default
- benutzt werden.
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ResetsFont
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-NeedProtect
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-[
-\emph on
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
0
-\emph default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
,
-\begin_inset space ~
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-1]
-\family default
-\series default
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+1
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-zeigt an, ob
-\emph on
-zerbrechliche
-\emph default
- Befehle in diesem Layout ge\SpecialChar \-
-schützt (
-\family typewriter
+] Ob die Einfügung die Schrift der benachbarten Umgebungen verwenden soll
+ oder seine eigene.
+ Voreinstellung ist
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-protect
-\family default
-) werden sollen.
- Es zeigt
\emph on
-nicht
-\emph default
- an, ob der Befehl selber geschützt werden soll.
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+: verwendet seine Eigene.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParbreakIsNewline
+Spellcheck
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+] Erlaubt es, den Inhalt der Einfügung auf Rechtschreibung zu überprüfen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Zähler
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Zähler"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Es ist notwendig Zähler (
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+chapter
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+figure
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+) in der Textklasse selber zu definieren.
+ Die Standardzähler sind in der Datei
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+stdcounters.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-Indicates that paragraphs will not be separated by an empty line in LaTeX
- output, but only by a line break; together with
+ definiert, so dass Sie nur die Zeile
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Input stdcounters.inc
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+zu zu Ihrer Layout-Datei hinzufügen müssen, damit sie arbeiten.
+ Aber wenn Sie eigene Zähler definieren wollen, können Sie das tun.
+ Zähler-Deklarationen beginnen mit
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Counter <Name>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+wobei
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Name>
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-PassThru 1
+\end_inset
+
+ der Name Ihres Zählers ist.
+ Die Deklaration endet mit
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+End
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, this allows to emulate a plain text editor (like the ERT inset).
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Folgende Parameter können auch benutzt werden:
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-PassThru
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
+\end_layout
-[
-\emph on
-0
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-1]
-\family default
-\series default
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset space ~
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-Legt fest, ob der Absatzinhalt unverändert ausgegeben werden soll, also
- ohne diverse von LaTeX benötigte Ersetzungen durchzuführen.
- Dies ersetzt in gewisser Weise das alte Zeichensatzattribut
-\family typewriter
-LaTe
-\begin_inset ERT
+] definiert, wie der Zähler dargestellt wird.
+ Hierdurch wird
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-{}
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-X
-\family default
-.
+ auf denselben Wert gesetzt.
+ In der Zeichenkette können folgende Konstrukte benutzt werden:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Preamble\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-EndPreamble
-\family default
-\series default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\backslash
+thecounter
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Eine Serie von Makrodefinitionen, die in die Präambel (vor
-\family typewriter
+ wird durch die Erweiterung von
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\backslash
-begin{docu\SpecialChar \-
-ment}
-\family default
-) eingefügt werden, falls dieses Layout benutzt wird.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+ (oder
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+) des Zählers
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-The prefix to use when creating labels referring to insets of this type.
- This allows the use of formatted references.
+ ersetzt.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
+Zählerwerte können durch LaTeX-ähnliche Makros wie
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+
+\emph on
+numbertype
+\emph default
+{
+\emph on
+counter
+\emph default
+}
+\end_layout
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-Requires
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-[string]
-\family default
-\series default
+ ausgedrückt werden, wobei
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\emph on
+numbertype
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Legt fest, dass das Layout die Funktion
-\family typewriter
-string
-\family default
- benötigt.
- Sehen Sie sich auch die Beschreibung von
-\family typewriter
-Provides
-\family default
+ Folgendes sein kann:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vpageref
-reference "Provides"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+arabic
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- an.
+: 1, 2, 3,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+alph
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+ für Kleinbuchstaben: a, b, c,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ResetsFont
+Alph
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ für Großbuchstaben: A, B, C,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+roman
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ für kleine römische Zahlen: i, ii, iii,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Roman
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-Whether this inset should use the font of its surrounding environment or
- uses its own.
- Default is true: uses its own.
+ für große römische Zahlen: I, II, III.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+Wenn
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spellcheck
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ nicht definiert ist, wird ein Standardwert wie folgt benutzt: wenn der
+ Zähler einen Hauptzähler
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+master
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ (über
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Within
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-Spellcheck the contents of this inset.
- Default is true.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Zähler
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Zähler"
-
-\end_inset
+ definiert) hat, wird der String
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\backslash
+themaster.
+\backslash
+arabic{counter}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Seit LyX-Version 1.3.0 ist es möglich und notwendig, Zähler (
-\family typewriter
-chapter
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-figure
-\family default
-,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-) in der Textklasse selber zu definieren.
- Die Standardzähler sind in der Datei
-\family typewriter
-lib/
-\begin_inset Newline linebreak
\end_inset
-layouts/stdcounters.inc
-\family default
- definiert, so dass Sie nur die Zeile
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Input stdcounters.inc
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-zu zu Ihrer Layout-Datei hinzufügen müssen, damit sie arbeiten.
- Aber wenn Sie eigene Zähler definieren wollen, können Sie das tun.
- Zähler-Deklarationen beginnen mit
-\end_layout
+ benutzt, ansonsten
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Counter name
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-wobei
-\family typewriter
-name
-\family default
- der Name Ihres Zählers ist.
- Die Deklaration endet mit
+\backslash
+arabic{counter}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-End
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-Folgende Parameter können auch benutzt werden:
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelString
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-[string=""]
-\family default
-
-\series default
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelStringAppendix
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-definiert, wie der Zähler dargestellt wird.
- Hierdurch wird
-\family typewriter
-LabelStringAp\SpecialChar \-
-pen\SpecialChar \-
-dix
-\family default
- auf denselben Wert gesetzt.
- In der Zeichenkette können folgende Konstrukte benutzt werden:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-thecounter
-\family default
- wird durch die Erweiterung von
-\family typewriter
-LabelString
-\family default
- (oder
-\family typewriter
-Label\SpecialChar \-
-StringAppendix
-\family default
-) des Zählers
-\family typewriter
-counter
-\family default
- ersetzt.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-Zählerwerte können durch LaTeX-ähnliche Makros wie
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-numbertype{coun\SpecialChar \-
-ter}
-\family default
-\emph default
- ausgedrückt werden, wobei
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-numbertype
-\family default
-\emph default
- folgendes sein kann:
-\begin_inset Foot
+] ist dasselbe wie
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Genaugenommen ist die Situation etwas komplizierter: andere
-\emph on
-numbertype
-\emph default
- als die beschriebenen erzeugen arabische Zahlen.
- Wahrscheinlich wird sich das in Zukunft ändern.
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\family typewriter
-arabic
-\family default
-: 1, 2, 3,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
-\family typewriter
-alph
-\family default
- für Kleinbuchstaben: a, b, c,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
-\family typewriter
-Alph
-\family default
- für Großbuchstaben: A, B, C,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
-\family typewriter
-roman
-\family default
- für kleine römische Zahlen: i, ii, iii,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
-\family typewriter
-Roman
-\family default
- für große römische Zahlen: I, II, III,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
-\family typewriter
-hebrew
-\family default
- für hebräische Zahlen.
+, aber für den Anhang.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Wenn
-\family typewriter
-LabelString
-\family default
- nicht definiert ist, wird ein Standardwert wie folgt benutzt: wenn der
- Zähler einen Hauptzähler
-\emph on
-master
-\emph default
- (über
-\family typewriter
-Within
-\family default
- definiert) hat, wird
-\family typewriter
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\backslash
-themaster.
-\backslash
-arabic{counter}
-\family default
- benutzt, sonst
-\family typewriter
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PrettyFormat
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-arabic{counter}
-\family default
-.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelStringAppendix
-\begin_inset space ~
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-[string=""]
-\family default
-
-\series default
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] Ein Format, das für Formatierte Querverweise auf einen Zähler verwendet
+ wird.
+ Möchte man z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+B.
+ Referenzen auf Abschnitte in der Form
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Abschnitt
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+2.4
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+ haben, sollte der String
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-ist dasselbe wie
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-LabelString
-\family default
-\series default
-, wird aber in Anhängen benutzt.
+##
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ enthalten.
+ Diese Zeichen werden später durch die referenzierte Abschnittsnummer ersetzt.
+ Also für Abschnitte lautet der String dann
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Abschnitt ##
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
Within
-\begin_inset space ~
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-[string=""]
-\family default
-
-\begin_inset space ~
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-Wenn dies auf den Namen eines anderen Zählers gesetzt wird, wird der gegenwärtig
-e Zähler jedesmal zurückgesetzt, wenn der andere erhöht wird.
+] Wenn dies auf den Namen eines anderen Zählers gesetzt wird, wird der gegenwärt
+ige Zähler jedes mal zurückgesetzt, wenn der andere erhöht wird.
Zum Beispiel wird
-\family typewriter
-\series default
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
subsection
-\family default
-\series medium
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
innerhalb
-\family typewriter
-\series default
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
section
-\family default
-\series medium
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
nummeriert.
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Valid arguments are:
+] Zulässige Argumente sind:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
emph
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
noun
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
strikeout
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
underbar
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
uuline
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
uwave
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
no_emph
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
no_noun
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
no_strikeout
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
no_bar
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
no_uuline
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+ und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
no_uwave
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Each of these turns on or off the corresponding attribute.
- For example,
+ Jedes schaltet die entsprechende Eigenschaft an oder aus.
+ Zum Beispiel führt
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
- turns on emphasis, and
+ zum Stil
+\emph on
+Hervorhebung
+\emph default
+ und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
no_emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
- turns it off.
-
+ schaltet diesen aus.
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-If the latter seems puzzling, remember that the font settings for the present
- context are generally inherited from the surrounding context.
- So
+Falls Sie Letzteres verwirrt, erinnern Sie sich, dass die Schrifteinstellungen
+ standardmäßig von den umgebenden Stilen übernommen wird.
+ Daher schaltet
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
no_emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
- would turn off the emphasis that was anyway in effect, say, in a theorem
- environment.
+ die
+\emph on
+Hervorhebung
+\emph default
+ aus, die z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+B.
+ in einer Theorem-Umgebung aktiv ist.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
followed by the volume key.
It is also possible to have an else clause in the conditional, such as:
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-.
- Here, the
+
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Here, the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\lang english
So here then is an example that use all these features:
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Standard
+\noindent
+
+\family typewriter
+\lang english
!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
This defines a macro that prints the author, followed by a comma, if the
\begin_inset Flex Code
\emph on
\lang english
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
\lang english
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
\lang english
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
\lang english
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-0,
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
+\lang english
1
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LYX_USERDIR_VER
+LYX_USERDIR_20x
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- Una cadena que indica la anchura del margen izquierdo en la pantalla, por
- ejemplo
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Una cadena que indica la anchura del margen izquierdo en la pantalla,
+ por ejemplo
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
MMMMM
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:Provides"
-
-\end_inset
-
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- Una cadena que indica la anchura del margen derecho en la pantalla, por
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Una cadena que indica la anchura del margen derecho en la pantalla, por
ejemplo,
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
MMMMM
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
\end_inset
- Establece qué divisiones se numeran.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Establece qué divisiones se numeran.
Corresponde al contador LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- Esta secuencia define un nuevo estilo de párrafo.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nombre>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Esta secuencia define un nuevo estilo de párrafo.
Si el estilo ya existe, en ese caso se redefinirán algunos de los parámetros.
Véase la sección
\begin_inset space ~
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle 1
+InTitle
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- corresponde al caso en que el bloque de párrafos que tienen
+ corresponde al caso en que todos los formatos que tienen
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle 1
+InTitle
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- Establece qué divisiones se incluyen en el índice general.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Establece qué divisiones se incluyen en el índice general.
Corresponde al contador LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PageStyle
+Other
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string="empty|plain|headings|fancy"
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Lista de los estilos de página disponibles, separados por
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-
+] Algunas opciones de clase de documento, separadas por coma, que se añadirán
+ a la parte opcional del comando
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-|
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+documentclass
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
.
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Other
+PageStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+string="empty|plain|headings|fancy"
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Algunas opciones de clase de documento, separadas por coma, que se añadirán
- a la parte opcional del comando
+] Lista de los estilos de página disponibles, separados por
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-documentclass
+|
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
.
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Esto sobrescribirá completamente cualquier anterior declaración
+ Esto sobrescribirá completamente cualquier anterior declaración
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
.
- Véase la sección
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
- El nombre de un estilo cuyo preámbulo debería salir
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nombre>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] El nombre de un estilo cuyo preámbulo debería salir
\emph on
antes
\emph default
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:FreeSpacing"
-
-\end_inset
-
-[
+ [
\emph on
\begin_inset Flex Code
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+ [
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[1, 0]
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Si 1, marca el estilo para ser incluido en el preámbulo del documento en
- lugar de en el cuerpo del documento.
+, marca el estilo para ser incluido en el preámbulo del documento en lugar
+ de en el cuerpo del documento.
Útil para clases de documento que piden informaciones tales como título
y autor en el preámbulo.
Esto solo funciona para estilos para los que
\end_inset
-
+ [
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Si es
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[1, 0]
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Si es 1, marca el estilo como parte de un bloque de título (véanse también
- las entradas globales
+, marca el estilo como parte de un bloque de título (véanse también las
+ entradas globales
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parsep
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Itemsep
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- [float=0] El espacio vertical entre la etiqueta y el cuerpo del texto.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float=0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] El espacio vertical entre la etiqueta y el cuerpo del texto.
Solo se usa para etiquetas que están sobre el cuerpo del texto (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-El nombre del contador para numeración automática.
-
+] El nombre del contador para numeración automática.
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
.
En ese caso, el contador avanzará un paso cada vez que que aparezca el
estilo.
-
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
LabelIndent
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- Texto que indica cuánto se debe sangrar una etiqueta.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Labelsep
-\end_layout
-
\end_inset
[
\end_inset
-] El espacio horizontal entre la etiqueta y el cuerpo del texto.
- Solo se usa para etiquetas que no están sobre el cuerpo del texto.
+] Texto que indica cuánto se debe sangrar una etiqueta.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+LabelSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] La cadena usada para una etiqueta del tipo
+] Texto que indica el valor de espacio horizontal entre la etiqueta y el
+ cuerpo del texto.
+ Solo se usa para etiquetas que no están sobre el cuerpo del texto.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Si
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- está establecido, esta cadena puede contener los comandos especiales de
- formato descritos en la sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Contadores"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Por motivos de compatibilidad retroactiva, la cadena
+] La cadena usada para una etiqueta del
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-@
-\emph on
-style-name
-\emph default
-@
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- será reemplazada por la ampliada
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- de estilo
+.
+ Si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-style-name
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Esta característica ahora está obsoleta y debería reemplazarse por los
- mecanismos de la sección
+ está establecido, esta cadena puede contener los comandos especiales de
+ formato descritos en la sección
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- reconfigura también
+ reconfigura también
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- [
+
+\lang ngerman
+
+\lang spanish
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\emph on
No_Label
\emph default
-, Manual, Static, Top_Environment, Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive,
- Enumerate, Itemize, Bibliography
+, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Itemize, Bibliography
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+]
\end_layout
\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
significa que la etiqueta es la primera palabra (hasta elprimer espacio
real).
- Usa espacios protegidos (como
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-este) si quieres más de una palabra como etiqueta.
+ Usa espacios protegidos si quieres más de una palabra como etiqueta.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
Esto es realmente `estático'.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- y
+
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+y
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- son casos especiales de
+ son casos especiales de
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
, por ejemplo.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
del contador asociado al flotante.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-El tipo de etiqueta
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
para más información.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
de profundidad posibles.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
También está codificado.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- El nombre correspondiente en LaTeX, ya sea de un comando o de un entorno.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nombre>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] El nombre correspondiente en LaTeX, ya sea de un comando o de un entorno.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- Un parámetro opcional para el correspondiente
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<parámetro>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Un parámetro opcional para el correspondiente
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
Paragraph
\emph default
, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\end_layout
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
List_Environment, Bib_Environment
\end_layout
\end_layout
\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
no significa nada especial.
-
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
.
-
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
se genera para cada párrafo de este entorno.
-
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-, excepto que
+, excepto que
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
se pasa como un argumento al entorno.
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\bar under
-Edit
-\bar default
-ar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-
-\bar under
+Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Configuración
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Bib_Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is like
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ but adds additionally the necessary mandatory argument to the begin statement
+ of the bibliography environment:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+begin{thebibliography}{99}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ It is therefore only useful for bibliography environments.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
-latexname[latexparam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
}
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
-begin{latexname}[latexparam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\backslash
-end{latexname}.
+end{LatexName}.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
-] Si pones estilos en entornos, los márgenes izquierdos no son simplemente
- añadidos, sino aumentados en un factor
-\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{depth+4}$
+] Si pones estilos en entornos, los
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LeftMargin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ no son simplemente añadidos, sino aumentados en un factor
+\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{depth}+4}$
\end_inset
.
- Anotar que este parámetro se usa también cuando el margen se define como
-
+ Anotar que este parámetro se usa también cuando
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Margin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ se define como
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
.
En ese caso se añade al margen manual o dinámico.
-
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-El argumento se pasa como una cadena de caracteres.
- Por ejemplo
+Por ejemplo
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
\end_inset
El tipo de margen que el estilo tiene en el lado izquierdo.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
significa un margen fijo.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
.
Esto se utiliza para componer bonitas listas sin tabuladores.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
corrientes no sean capaces de hacer esto.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
es similar, pero solo la primera fila del párrafo es dinámica, mientras
que las demás son estáticas; esto se emplea, por ejemplo, para descripciones.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- Nombre de un estilo que ha reemplazado este estilo.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nombre>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Nombre de un estilo que ha reemplazado este estilo.
Esto se emplea para renombrar un estilo, mientras que se mantiene compatibilida
d hacia atrás.
\end_layout
ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:ParbreakIsNewline"
-
\end_inset
[
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parsep
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- para componer un documento.
+ para
+\lang english
+ separate paragraphs
+\lang spanish
+.
Si se elige
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-value
+Parskip
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
.
- Véase arriba (página
+ Véase arriba (
+\lang english
+sec
+\lang spanish
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:Provides"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Parámetros-generales-clases"
\end_inset
\emph on
single
-\emph default
-, onehalf, double, other
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph on
-value
-\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+onehalf
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+double
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+other
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<valor>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
] Esto define cuál debería ser el espacio predefinido en el estilo.
Los argumentos
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
- implica la generación de código LaTeX específico, usando el paquete
+ implica la generación de código LaTeX específico, usando el paquete LaTeX
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace.sty
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
,
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\series medium
-TocLevel [int]
+int=3
\end_layout
\end_inset
- El nivel del estilo en el índice general.
+] El nivel del estilo en el índice general.
Esto se usa para la numeración automática de los encabezados de sección.
\end_layout
\backslash
renewcommand{
\backslash
-claimname}{Affirmation}}
+claimname}{Affirmation}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\backslash
addto
\backslash
\backslash
renewcommand{
\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}}
+claimname}{Behauptung}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\backslash
providecommand{
\backslash
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Desde la versión 1.3.0 de LyX, ha sido posible y necesario definir los flotantes
- (
+Es necesario definir los flotantes (
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
] La cadena que se usará en los menús y también para la leyenda.
- Esto se traduce al idioma actual si se usa
-\lang english
- used.
+ Esto se traduce al idioma actual si se usa.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- Se usan para salidar XHTML.
- Véase
+ Controlan la salida XHTML.
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Etiquetas-para-XHTML"
\emph on
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
0
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
] Indica si el flotante está ya definido en la clase de documento o si necesitam
-os cargar
+os cargar el paquete LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y usarlo para definirlo sobre la marcha.
+ para definirlo sobre la marcha.
Por omisión
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
] Este argumento (opcional) determina si los flotantes de esta clase serán
numerados dentro de alguna unidad de sección del documento.
- Por ejemplo, si es igual a
+ Por ejemplo, si
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NumberWithin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ es
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
, los flotantes serán numerados dentro de los capítulos.
\end_layout
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
0
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] Nos dice si este flotante se define usando las facilidades provistas por
-
+] Nos dice si este flotante se define usando el paquete LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyX ha soportado estilos de texto desde la versión 1.4.0; desde la versión
- 1.6.0, estos son denominados recuadros flexibles.
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-InsetLayout <Type>
+InsetLayout <type>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Type>
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Type>
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- El color para el fondo del recuadro.
- Los colores válidos son los definidos en
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nombre>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] El color para el fondo del recuadro.
+ Los nombres colores válidos son definidos en
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[string]
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Copia todas las características de un estilo existente en el actual.
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles
+\lang spanish
+, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\lang english
+Note that you need to specify the complete type, e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+g
+\lang spanish
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CopyStyle Flex:<nombre>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
.
- Indica si el entorno se ubicará en su propio espacio en la salida LaTeX
- o si aparecerá en línea con el texto circundante.
+ Indica si el entorno se ubicará en su propio espacio en la salida o si
+ aparecerá en línea con el texto circundante.
Si se pone falso, se supone que el entorno LaTeX ignora los espacios en
blanco (incluyendo un carácter de línea nueva) después de las etiquetas
\end_inset
- Requerido al final de las declaraciones de formato del recuadro.
+ Requerido al final de las declaraciones de formato del recuadro
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- Fuerza el idioma
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Fuerza el idioma
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
latex
\end_inset
,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\emph default
-,
+,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] Usualmente LyX no permite insertar más de un espacio entre palabras, puesto
- que un espacio se considera como la separación entre dos palabras, no un
- carácter o símbolo por sí mismo.
- Esto es una buena cosa pero a veces puede ser molesta, por ejemplo, para
- escribir código de programas o de LaTeX puro.
- Por esta razón se puede habilitar
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph style
+\lang spanish
+s, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
-\end_layout
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
\end_inset
.
- Anotar que LyX creará espacios protegidos para los espacios adicionales
- en modos que no sean LaTeX.
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
Controlan la salida XHTML.
- Véase la sección
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Etiquetas-para-XHTML"
\end_inset
,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\emph default
-,
+,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] Habitualmente, LyX no permite dejar un párrafo vacío, porque llevaría
- a una salida de LaTeX vacía.
- Sin embargo, hay algunos casos donde podría ser útil: en una plantilla
- de carta, los campos requeridos pueden proporcionarse vacíos, así el usuario
- no los olvida; en algunos casos especiales, se puede usar un estilo que
- no contiene texto real como una especie de salto.
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles
+\lang spanish
+, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- Lo que se mostrará sobre el botón u otra parte como etiqueta del recuadro.
- Algunos tipos de recuadro (
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-código TeX
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- y
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Ramas
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) modifican esta etiqueta sobre la marcha.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
-\end_layout
-
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- El nombre LaTeX correspondiente al asunto.
- Cualquier nombre de entorno o de comando.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexParam
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- El parámetro opcional para el correspondiente
+] Lo que se mostrará sobre el botón u otra parte como etiqueta del recuadro.
+ Algunos tipos de recuadro (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+código TeX
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, incluyendo posibles pares de corchetes,
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[]
+Ramas
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Este parámetro no se puede cambiar desde dentro de LyX.
+) modifican esta etiqueta sobre la marcha.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-Paragraph
-\emph default
-, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
+<nombre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment, Bib_Environment
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-] Cómo debería traducirse el estilo a LaTeX.
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- es un poco engañoso porque estas reglas se aplican también a clases SGML.
- Consulta los archivos de clases SGML para ejemplos concretos.
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
+] El nombre LaTeX correspondiente al asunto.
+ Cualquier nombre de entorno o de comando.
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Paragraph
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
- no significa nada especial.
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Command
+<parámetro>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- significa
+] El parámetro opcional para el correspondiente
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-
-\emph on
LatexName
-\emph default
-{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- significa
+, incluyendo posibles pares de corchetes,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+[]
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- eslo mismo que
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-, excepto que un
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-item
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- se genera para cada párrafo de este entorno.
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- es lo mismo que
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+ Este parámetro no se puede cambiar desde dentro de LyX.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-, excepto que
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se pasa como un argumento al entorno.
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- puede definirse en el diálogo
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\bar under
-Edit
-\bar default
-ar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-
-\bar under
-Configuración
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles
+\lang spanish
+, véase sección
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-de
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-párrafos
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
\end_inset
.
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Poniendo juntas las últimas cosas, la salida LaTeX será una de estas:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-latexname[latexparam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-o:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-begin{latexname}[latexparam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{latexname}.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-dependiendo del tipo de LaTeX.
-\end_layout
-
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyxType
+LyxType
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
+charstyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ es falso.
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- es falso.
-
+ se puede poner como verdadero para recuadros de estilos
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se puede poner como verdadero para recuadros de estilos de texto, si se
- desea, poniéndolo
+, si poniéndolo
\emph on
después
\emph default
\end_inset
,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] Igual que para estilos de párrafo (véase la página
+] Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:ParbreakIsNewline"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
\end_inset
-).
+.
Por omisión es falso.
\end_layout
\emph default
-,
+,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] Si el contenido de este párrafo debería aparecer en la salida en forma
- cruda, es decir sin las traducciones especiales que LaTeX necesitaría.
+] Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- Información a incluir en el preámbulo LaTeX cuando se usa este estilo.
- Utilizado para definir macros, paquetes a cargar, etc., requeridos por este
- estilo en particular.
- Debe terminar con
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+ Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndPreamble
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
.
\end_inset
-] Si el estilo requiere la característica
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Véase arriba (página
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:Provides"
-
+] Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-) la descripción de
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Provides
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
\end_inset
- para información sobre 'características'.
-
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Desde la versión 1.3.0 de LyX, es posible y necesario definir los contadores
- (
+Es necesario definir los contadores (
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Counter CounterName
+Counter <nombre>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-donde 'CounterName' es el que des al contador.
- Hay que terminar con
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-
+donde
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-End
+<nombre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ es el nombre del contador.
+ Hay que terminar con
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+End
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
.
- Se pueden usar además los parámetros siguientes:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Se pueden usar además los parámetros siguientes:
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- puede ser:
-\begin_inset Foot
-status open
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-En realidad, la situación es un poco más complicada: cualquier
-\emph on
-numbertype
-\emph default
- distinto de los descritos a continuación generará números arábigos.
- No sería una sorpresa ver esto cambiado en el futuro.
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
+ puede ser:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- para romanos en mayúsculas: I, II, III\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+ para romanos en mayúsculas: I, II, III.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Standard
+Si no se define
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hebrew
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para números hebreos.
-\end_layout
-
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-Si no se define LabelString, se construye un valor por omisión así: si el
- contador tiene un contador maestro
+, se construye un valor por omisión así: si el contador tiene un contador
+ maestro
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-Sección 2.4
+Sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+2.4
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
\end_inset
lo desactiva.
-
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
seguido de la clave.
También es posible tener una cláusula de otro modo en el condicional, como:
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-.
- Aquí, la clave
+
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Aquí, la clave
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Standard
Aquí hay, pues, un ejemplo que usa todas estas características:
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Standard
+\noindent
+
+\family typewriter
!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
Así definimos una macro que imprime el autor seguido de coma, si la clave
\begin_inset Flex Code
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0,
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
1
\end_layout
Ces répertoires sont complètement indépendants (mais lisez la suite).
Notez que positionner la variable d'environnement
\family typewriter
-LYX_USERDIR_VER
+LYX_USERDIR_20x
\family default
a exactement le même effet.
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
2
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- fixe le nombre implicite de colonnes (une ou deux).
+] fixe le nombre implicite de colonnes (une ou deux).
Peut être changé dans la fenêtre
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
- ]définit les paramètres d'un nouveau compteur.
+] définit les paramètres d'un nouveau compteur.
Si le compteur n'existe pas, il est créé; s'il existe, il est modifié.
Doit être fermé par
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
-spécifie un module inclus implicitement avec cette classe de document, donné
- par son nom de fichier sans suffixe
+] spécifie un module inclus implicitement avec cette classe de document,
+ donné par son nom de fichier sans suffixe
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- indique le style qui sera appliqué aux nouveaux paragraphes, habituellement
+] indique le style qui sera appliqué aux nouveaux paragraphes, habituellement
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- indique que le module spécifié — donné par son nom de fichier sans le suffixe
-
+] indique que le module spécifié — donné par son nom de fichier sans le
+ suffixe
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Float
+Float
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:flottants"
+reference "sub:Flottants"
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLPreamble
+HTMLPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLPreamble
+HTMLPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-AddToHTMLPreamble
+AddToHTMLPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
-antérieure (utiliser
+antérieure (utiliser
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-AddToHTMLPreamble
+AddToHTMLPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
si vous désirez simplement ajouter du contenu).
- Voir la Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:flottants"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
Doit être fermé par
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-IfStyle
+IfStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
MMMMM
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
\lang french
\family default
-\lang english
-
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- indique quelle sorte de format de fichier (tel que défini dans la fenêtre
+] indique quelle sorte de format de fichier (tel que défini dans la fenêtre
Préférences) est produit par cette classe.
Elle est surtout utile quand
\begin_inset Flex Code
\lang french
\family default
-\lang english
-
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- indique quelle sorte de document résultant sera obtenu par cette classe.
+] indique quelle sorte de document résultant sera obtenu par cette classe.
Actuellement, les options sont:
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
\family default
-\lang english
-
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+] [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- indique que ce format fournit la fonctionnalité du module indiqué, qui
+] indique que ce format fournit la fonctionnalité du module indiqué, qui
doit être spécifié par le nom du fichier dans le suffixe
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- indique que la classe nécessite la fonctionnalité
+] indique que la classe nécessite la fonctionnalité
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\lang french
- indique la largeur de la marge droite à l'écran, par exemple
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+chaîne
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] indique la largeur de la marge droite à l'écran, par exemple
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
MMMMM
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
\lang french
\family default
-fixe quels sectionnements doivent être numérotés.
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] fixe quels sectionnements doivent être numérotés.
Correspond au compteur
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\emph on
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
2
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- fixe l'option implicite d'impression recto seul ou en recto verso.
+] fixe l'option implicite d'impression recto seul ou en recto verso.
Peut être changé dans la fenêtre
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\lang french
- définit un nouveau style de paragraphe.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nom>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] définit un nouveau style de paragraphe.
Si le style n'existe pas, il est créé; s'il existe déjà, ses paramètres
sont modifiés.
Doit être fermé par
\family typewriter
\lang french
- [chaîne="maketitle"]
+
\family default
- définit nom de la commande ou de l'environnement mentionné ci-dessous.
+[
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+chaîne=
+\lang english
+"maketitle"
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
+] définit nom de la commande ou de l'envi\SpecialChar \-
+ronnement mentionné ci-dessous.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\family typewriter
\lang french
- [
+
+\family default
+\lang english
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
+\lang english
CommandAfter
-\emph default
-, Environment]
-\family default
- indique le genre de balisage utilisé pour définir le titre d'un document.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
+] indique le genre de balisage utilisé pour définir le titre d'un document.
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle 1
+InTitle
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- est un environnement, dans lequel doit être inclus le bloc de paragraphes
- avec
+ est un environnement, dans lequel doit être inclus tous les formats avec
+
\family typewriter
\begin_inset Quotes fld
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle 1
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+InTitle
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
\family typewriter
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-fixe quels sectionnements sont inclus dans la table des matières.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] fixe quels sectionnements sont inclus dans la table des matières.
Correspond au compteur
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-PageStyle
+Other
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
[
\family typewriter
-chaîne="empty|plain|headings|fancy"
+chaîne=""
\family default
-] liste les mises en page disponibles, séparées par un
-\family typewriter
+] introduit certaines options de la classe de document, séparées par une
+ virgule, qui seront ajoutées à la partie optionnelle de la commande
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+documentclass
+\end_layout
-|
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-
-\family default
.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Other
+PageStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
[
\family typewriter
-chaîne=""
+chaîne="empty|plain|headings|fancy"
\family default
-] introduit certaines options de la classe de document, séparées par une
- virgule, qui seront ajoutées à la partie optionnelle de la commande
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+] liste les mises en page disponibles, séparées par un
+\family typewriter
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-documentclass
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+|
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
+
+\family default
.
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-]
+[chaîne]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
fixe la catégorie pour ce style.
Ceci est utilise pour regrouper les styles apparentés dans le menu déroulant
des styles de la barre d'outils.
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-]
+[chaîne]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
sert à copier toutes les caractéristiques d'un style déjà existant dans
un nouveau style.
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-nomme un style dont le préambule devra être placé
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nom>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] nomme un style dont le préambule devra être placé
\emph on
avant
\emph default
\lang french
- fixe la chaîne utilisée pour le marqueur quand
+ fixe la chaîne utilisée pour le marqueur quand
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:-Freespacing"
-
-\end_inset
-
-
\lang french
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-, 1
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
] LyX ne permet pas d'habitude d'insérer plus d'une espace entre deux mots,
car une espace est considérée comme un séparateur de mots, non comme un
caractère ou un symbole en tant que tel.
\family typewriter
\lang french
- [1, 0]
+
\family default
- indique avec 1 que que le style doit être inclus dans le préambule plutôt
- que dans le corps du document.
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] indique avec
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ que que le style doit être inclus dans le préambule plutôt que dans le
+ corps du document.
Ceci est utile pour les classes de document qui désirent que les informations
telles que le titre et l'auteur figurent dans le préambule.
Notez bien que ceci ne fonctionne que pour les styles pour lesquels
\family typewriter
\lang french
- [1, 0]
-\family default
- indique avec 1 que le style fait partie d'un bloc de titre (voir aussi
+\family default
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] indique avec
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ que le style fait partie d'un bloc de titre (voir aussi
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
TitleLatexType
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
TitleLatexName
\end_layout
\lang french
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
float=0
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
] crée un espacement supplémentaire entre les paragraphes du même style
dans un environnement.
Si vous emboîtez des paragraphes d'autres formats dans un environnement,
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parsep
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Itemsep
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-, 1
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
] LyX ne permet pas d'habitude de laisser un paragraphe vide, car il ne
générerait rien en LaTeX.
Il y a quelques cas où c'est pourtant utile : dans un modèle pour une lettre,
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelBottomsep
+LabelBottomSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\family typewriter
\lang french
- [float=0]
+
\family default
- fixe l'espacement vertical entre le marqueur et le corps du texte.
- Sert seulement pour les marqueurs qui sont au dessus du corps du texte
- (
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Top_Environment
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] fixe l'espacement vertical entre le marqueur et le corps du texte.
+ Sert seulement pour les marqueurs qui sont au dessus du corps du texte
+ (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Centered_Top_Environment
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
+ et
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Centered_Top_Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
dénomme le compteur pour la numérotation automatique.
-
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
\end_inset
-, monEnumiii et monEnumiv, tout à fait comme en LaTeX.
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+monEnumiii
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ et
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+monEnumiv
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, tout à fait comme en LaTeX.
Ces compteurs doivent être tous déclarés séparément.
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
\end_inset
- pour les détails sur les compteurs).
+ pour les détails sur les compteurs.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\lang french
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+[chaîne=""]
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
fixe le texte indiquent l'importance de l'indentation d'un marqueur.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Labelsep
+LabelSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
-\lang english
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- fixe l'espacement horizontal entre le marqueur et le corps du texte.
+ fixe le texte indiquent l'espacement horizontal entre le marqueur et le
+ corps du texte.
Sert seulement pour les marqueurs qui ne sont pas au dessus du corps du
texte.
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
\lang french
- fixe la chaîne utilisée comme marqueur avec le type
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Quand
+ fixe la chaîne utilisée comme marqueur avec le
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelCounter
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- est indiqué, cette chaîne peut contenir les instructions de formatage particuli
-ères décrites dans la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Compteurs"
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Pour les besoins de la rétrocompatibilité, la chaîne
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-@
-\emph on
-style-name
-\emph default
-@
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- sera remplacée par le paramètre
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang french
+.
+ Quand
\lang english
-LabelString
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
- du style
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
\lang english
-style-name
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Cette fonctionnalité est maintenant obsolète et doit être remplacée par
- les mécanismes décrits à la section
+
+\lang french
+ est indiqué, cette chaîne peut contenir les instructions de formatage particuli
+ères décrites dans la section
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
\begin_layout Description
\lang english
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
est utilisée dans un appendice à la place de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- écrase
+ écrase
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang ngerman
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
+\lang ngerman
No_Label
\emph default
-, Manual, Static, Top_Environment, Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive,
- Enumerate, Itemize, Bibliography
+, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Itemize, Bibliography
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+
+\lang french
+]
\end_layout
\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Manual
\end_layout
le marqueur.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Static
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
LabelString
\end_layout
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+et
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Centered_Top_Environment
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Static
\end_layout
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Sensitive
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Sensitive
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
FloatType N
\end_layout
est la valeur du compteur associé au flottant.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-Les marqueurs de type
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Counter
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
LabelString
\end_layout
sera déployée pour résoudre tout conflit de référence de compteur qui apparaîtr
ait.
- Par exemple, ce pourrait être
+ Par exemple, ce pourrait être
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Section
\backslash
thechapter.
pour des précisions sur le compteurs.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Enumerate
\end_layout
profondeurs possibles.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
Il est également défini en dur.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\lang french
- fixe le nom de l'objet LaTeX correspondant, soit l'environnement, soit
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nom>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] fixe le nom de l'objet LaTeX correspondant, soit l'environnement, soit
la commande.
\end_layout
\lang french
- fixe le paramètre facultatif de l'objet
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<paramètre>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] fixe le paramètre facultatif de l'objet
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- [
+
+\lang ngerman
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
+\lang ngerman
Paragraph
\emph default
, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\end_layout
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
List_Environment, Bib_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
-
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-décrit comment traduire l'environnement en LaTeX.
+\lang french
+] décrit comment traduire l'environnement en LaTeX.
\end_layout
\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
pour chaque paragraphe de l'environnement.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-, sauf que
+, sauf que
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
est passé en paramètre de l'environnement.
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
.
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Bib_Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is like
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ but adds additionally the necessary mandatory argument to the begin statement
+ of the bibliography environment:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+begin{thebibliography}{99}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ It is therefore only useful for bibliography environments.
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Standard
En collectant ces derniers éléments, l'exportation LaTeX sera ou bien:
\end_layout
\lang english
\backslash
-latexname[latexparam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
}
\end_layout
\lang english
\backslash
-begin{latexname}[latexparam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\backslash
-end{latexname}.
+end{LatexName}.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
en fonction du type LaTeX.
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\lang english
\lang french
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+[chaîne=""]
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ fixe la marge gauche: si vous mettez des styles dans un environnement,
+ les
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- fixe la marge gauche: si vous mettez des styles dans un environnement,
- les marges de gauche ne seront pas ajoutées directement, mais avec un facteur
-
-\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{profondeur+4}$
+ ne seront pas ajoutées directement, mais avec un facteur
+\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{profondeur}+4}$
\end_inset
.
- Notez que ce paramètre sert aussi quand la marge est définie comme
+ Notez que ce paramètre sert aussi quand
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Margin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
+ est définie comme
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Manual
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Dynamic
\end_layout
.
Il est alors ajouté à la marge manuelle ou dynamique.
-
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-L'argument est passé comme une chaîne: par exemple,
+Par exemple,
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
\lang french
fixe le type de marge à gauche du format.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
veut dire une marge fixe.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Manual
\end_layout
.
Ceci sert à obtenir des listes bien mises en page sans tabulations.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
, même si les autres traitements de texte ne savent pas le faire.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
First_Dynamic
\end_layout
est similaire, mais seulement la toute première ligne du paragraphe est
dynamique, les autres étant statiques; ceci est utile par exemple pour
les descriptions.
-
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Right_Address_Box
\end_layout
Ceci sert à typographier une adresse sur le bord droit de la page.
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\lang english
\lang french
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
] indique si les commandes fragiles doivent être protégées par
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\lang french
[
-\family typewriter
-0,
-\family default
-
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
1
-\family default
-\emph default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
] indique si les nouvelles lignes sont traduites ou non en sauts de ligne
LaTeX (
\begin_inset Flex Code
\lang french
[
-\family typewriter
-1,
-\family default
-
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
0
-\family default
-\emph default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
] indique si LyX indente ou non la première ligne du paragraphe suivant.
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-dénomme un style qui a remplacé ce style en cours.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nom>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] dénomme un style qui a remplacé ce style en cours.
Ceci est utilisé pour renommer un style en conservant la rétrocompatibilité.
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
int=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
-fixe le nombre d'arguments facultatifs qui peuvent être utilisés avec ce
- style.
+] fixe le nombre d'arguments facultatifs qui peuvent être utilisés avec
+ ce style.
Ceci est utile pour par exemple pour les en-têtes de section, et n'a de
sens qu'avec LaTeX.
Noter que, dans le résultat, les arguments optionnels précéderont les arguments
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
-[
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\family typewriter
\emph on
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\family typewriter
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\family default
] indique que les paragraphes ne seront pas séparés par une ligne vide dans
le résultat LaTeX, mais par un retour à la ligne; combiné avec
\begin_inset Flex Code
\lang french
-\lang english
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
fixe l'indentation de la toute première ligne d'un paragraphe.
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
- de l'environnement, pas le leur.
+ de l'environne\SpecialChar \-
+ment, pas le leur.
Par exemple, les paragraphes
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Parsep
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- pour séparer les paragraphes d'un document.
+ pour séparer les paragraphes.
Quand on choisit
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\lang french
[
-\family typewriter
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-, 1
-\family default
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
] indique si le contenu du paragraphe doit être passé sous forme brute,
c'est-à-dire sans les traductions spéciales dont LaTeX aurait besoin.
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
int=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- précise le nombre d'arguments attendus par la commande ou l'environnement
+] précise le nombre d'arguments attendus par la commande ou l'environnement
LaTeX correspondant à ce style.
Dans le cas d'une commande, ce sont les arguments requis autres que ceux
qui sont associés au contenu du paragraphe proprement dit.
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- indique que le style requiert la fonctionnalité chaîne.
+] indique que le style requiert la fonctionnalité chaîne.
Voir la description de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- ci-dessus (page
+ ci-dessus (
+\lang english
+sec
+\lang french
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:-Freespacing"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Paramètres-généraux-d'une"
\end_inset
\lang french
-
-\lang english
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- similaire à
+] similaire à
\family typewriter
LeftMargin
\family default
\lang french
- [
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-single
-\emph default
-, onehalf, double, other
-\family default
+\lang english
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
-valeur
-\emph default
+\lang english
+single
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+onehalf
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+double
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+other
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<valeur>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
] définit l'interligne par défaut dans ce style.
Les paramètres
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
implique de générer du code LaTeX spécifique, qui utilise le paquetage
-
+ LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace.sty
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\series medium
-\lang english
-int
+int=3
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
-fixe le niveau du style dans le table des matières.
+] fixe le niveau du style dans le table des matières.
Ceci est utilisé pour la numérotation automatique des en-têtes.
\end_layout
\backslash
renewcommand{
\backslash
-claimname}{Affirmation}}
+claimname}{Affirmation}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\backslash
addto
\backslash
\backslash
renewcommand{
\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}}
+claimname}{Behauptung}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\backslash
providecommand{
\backslash
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sec:flottants"
-
-\end_inset
-
-Depuis la version 1.3.0 de LyX, il faut définir les flottants (
+Il faut définir les flottants (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\lang french
\family default
-\lang english
-
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- définit le suffixe d'un fichier auxiliaire contenant la liste des flottants
+] définit le suffixe d'un fichier auxiliaire contenant la liste des flottants
de ce type.
LaTeX écrit les légendes dans ce fichier.
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- définit la chaîne de caractères qui se trouvera dans les menus et également
+] définit la chaîne de caractères qui se trouvera dans les menus et également
dans la légende.
Ceci est traduit dans le langage courant si
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-sont utilisées avec l'exportation XHTML.
+ sont utilisées avec l'exportation XHTML.
Voir
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
IsPredefined
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
] indique si le flottant est déjà défini dans la classe de document ou s'il
- faut charger
+ faut charger le paquetage LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et utiliser ses fonctionnalités pour le définir à la volée.
+ pour le définir à la volée.
La valeur implicite est
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- détermine la commande utilisée pour engendrer une liste de flottants du
+] détermine la commande utilisée pour engendrer une liste de flottants du
type considéré; le
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- fixe le titre utilisé pour une liste des flottants du type considéré (figures,
+] fixe le titre utilisé pour une liste des flottants du type considéré (figures,
tableaux, etc.).
Il est utilisé pour l'étiquette à l'écran dans LyX; il est passé à LaTeX
pour être utilisé comme titre, et il est également utilisé comme titre
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- (paramètre facultatif) détermine si les flottants de cette classe seront
+] (paramètre facultatif) détermine si les flottants de cette classe seront
numérotés en suivant un type de section du document.
- Par exemple, si vous mettez
+ Par exemple, si
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chapter
+
+\lang english
+NumberWithin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, les flottants seront numérotés chapitre par chapitre.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\lang french
+ es
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Placement
+chapter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+, les flottants seront numérotés chapitre par chapitre.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
+Placement
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- définit le placement implicite pour cette catégorie de flottants.
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+chaîne
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] définit le placement implicite pour cette catégorie de flottants.
C'est comme en LaTeX standard :
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- fixe le style utilisé quand on définit le flottant avec
+] fixe le style utilisé quand on définit le flottant avec
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- définit le
+] définit le
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] indique si ce flottant est défini en utilisant les fonctionnalités fournies
- par
+] indique si ce flottant est défini en utilisant le paquetage LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyX connaît les styles de caractères depuis la version 1.4.0; depuis la version
- 1.6.0, ceux-ci sont appelés inserts flexibles.
-\end_layout
-
\begin_layout Standard
Les inserts flexibles sont de trois sortes:
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-InsetLayout <Type>
+InsetLayout <type>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<Type>
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<Type>
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\lang french
-définit la couleur d'arrière-plan de l'insert.
- Les couleurs valides sont définies dans
+] définit la couleur d'arrière-plan de l'insert.
+ Les noms de couleurs valides sont définies dans
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- indique s'il faut utiliser le contenu de l'insert comme une étiquette,
+] indique s'il faut utiliser le contenu de l'insert comme une étiquette,
quand l'insert est fermé.
Valeur implicite: faux.
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-]
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- sert à copier toutes les caractéristiques d'un style déjà existant dans
- un nouveau style.
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec
+\lang french
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+
+\lang english
+Note that you need to specify the complete type, e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+g.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+CopyStyle Flex:<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- indique si l'utilisateur peut utiliser le dialogue
+] indique si l'utilisateur peut utiliser le dialogue
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Paramètres
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-de
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-paragraphe
+Paramètres de paragraphe
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-, décrivant l'apparence du cadre et des boutons de l'insert.
+, décrivant l'appa\SpecialChar \-
+rence du cadre et des boutons de l'insert.
les notes de bas de page utilisent en général
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
-n'est utilisé que lorsque
+] n'est utilisé que lorsque
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
.
Indique si l'environnement se trouvera à part dans le résultat imprimable
- LaTeX ou bien apparaîtra inclus dans le texte environnant.
+ ou bien apparaîtra inclus dans le texte environnant.
S'il est positionné à faux, on suppose que l'environnement LaTeX ignore
les espaces (avec un caractère retour ligne inclus) après les balises
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
- est requis pour fermer la déclaration d'un InsetLayout.
+ est requis pour fermer la déclaration d'un
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\lang french
- impose le langage
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] impose le langage
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- indique si
+] indique si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-[
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-0
-\emph default
-, 1
-\family default
-] LyX ne permet pas d'habitude d'insérer plus d'une espace entre deux mots,
- car une espace est considérée comme un séparateur de mots, non comme un
- caractère ou un symbole en tant que tel.
- C'est très bien mais c'est parfois ennuyeux, par exemple pour taper un
- code source de programme ou du code LaTeX brut.
- C'est pourquoi on peut activer
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Noter que LyX créera les espaces insécables correspondants aux espaces
- additionnelles pour tous les modes autres que le mode LaTeX.
- Valeur implicite: faux.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec
+\lang french
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTML*
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\lang french
-sont utilisées avec l'exportation XHTML.
+ sont utilisées avec l'exportation XHTML.
Voir
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- indique s'il faut inclure le contenu de cet insert dans les chaînes créées
+] indique s'il faut inclure le contenu de cet insert dans les chaînes créées
pour le panneau
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
-[
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-0
-\emph default
-, 1
-\family default
-] LyX ne permet pas d'habitude de laisser un paragraphe vide, car il ne
- générerait rien en LaTeX.
- Il y a quelques cas où c'est pourtant utile : dans un modèle pour une lettre,
- les champs requis peuvent être laissés vides, pour que les gens ne les
- oublient pas; dans certains cas particuliers, un style peut aussi servir
- de séparateur, et ne pas contenir de texte.
- Valeur implicite: faux.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-LabelFont
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- définit la police utilisée pour le marqueur.
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:polices"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Noter que cette directive ne peut jamais apparaître avant
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Font
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, sinon elle sera sans effet.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+]
\lang english
-LabelString
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
+As with paragraph styles, see sec
\lang french
- définit la chaîne de caractères qui apparaîtra sur le bouton ou ailleurs
- en tant que marquer d'insert.
- Quelques types d'inserts (
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-code TeX
-\end_layout
-
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- et
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Branche
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
\end_inset
-) modifient ce marqueur à la volée.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LatexName
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- définit le nom du code LaTeX correspondant, soit un environnement, soit
- une commande.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LatexParam
-\end_layout
-
+ définit la police utilisée pour le marqueur.
+ Voir la section
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\lang french
- définit le paramètre facultatif pour le
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LatexName
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:polices"
\end_inset
- correspondant, y compris des paires de crochets
+.
+ Noter que cette directive ne peut jamais apparaître avant
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-[]
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Ce paramètre ne peut pas être modifié depuis LyX.
+, sinon elle sera sans effet.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LatexType
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-\lang english
-Paragraph
-\emph default
-, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+] définit la chaîne de caractères qui apparaîtra sur le bouton ou ailleurs
+ en tant que marquer d'insert.
+ Quelques types d'inserts (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-List_Environment, Bib_Environment
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-]
-\lang french
-
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-décrit comment traduire l'environnement en LaTeX.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Paragraph
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- veut dire
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-rien de spécial
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Command
+code TeX
\end_layout
\end_inset
- veut dire
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
+Branche
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+) modifient ce marqueur à la volée.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
- veut dire
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
+\lang english
LatexName
-\emph default
-}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+<nom>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est la même chose que
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+] définit le nom du code LaTeX correspondant, soit un environnement, soit
+ une commande.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-, sauf qu'il génère un
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-item
+\lang english
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour chaque paragraphe de l'environnement.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- est la même chose que
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+<paramètre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, sauf que
+] définit le paramètre facultatif pour le
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
- est passé en paramètre de l'environnement.
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+\lang english
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- peut être défini dans la fenêtre
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ correspondant, y compris des paires de crochets
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Paramètres
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-de
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Paragraphe
+\lang english
+[]
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
+ Ce paramètre ne peut pas être modifié depuis LyX.
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-En collectant ces derniers éléments, l'exportation LaTeX sera ou bien:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Description
\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\backslash
-latexname[latexparam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-ou bien:
+\lang english
+LatexType
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+ As with paragraph styles, see sec
+\lang french
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-begin{latexname}[latexparam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{latexname}.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-en fonction du type LaTeX.
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-, si vous le souhaitez, en le positionnant
+, en le positionnant
\emph on
après
\emph default
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- indique si plusieurs paragraphes sont autorisés dans cet insert.
+] indique si plusieurs paragraphes sont autorisés dans cet insert.
Ceci positionnera aussi
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- indique si les commandes fragiles de cet insert doivent êtres protégées
+] indique si les commandes fragiles de cet insert doivent êtres protégées
par
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-[
+ [
\family typewriter
\emph on
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
+\family default
\emph default
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\family typewriter
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\family typewriter
1
\end_layout
\family default
-] indique que les paragraphes ne seront pas séparés par une ligne vide dans
- le résultat LaTeX, mais par un retour à la ligne; combiné avec
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec
+\lang french
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru 1
-\end_layout
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
\end_inset
-, ceci permet d'émuler une éditeur plein texte (comme l'insert code TeX).
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-[
+ [
\family typewriter
\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
0
-\emph default
-, 1
-\family default
-] indique si le contenu du paragraphe doit être passé sous forme brute,
- c'est-à-dire sans les traductions spéciales dont LaTeX aurait besoin.
- Valeur implicite: faux.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+
+\family default
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\family typewriter
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Preamble
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
+\family default
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec
\lang french
-fixe le contenu à inclure dans le préambule LaTeX quand le style est utilisé.
- Utile pour définir des macros, charger des paquetages, etc.
- requis pour ce style particulier.
- Doit être fermé par
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-EndPreamble
+Preamble
\end_layout
+\end_inset
+
+ As with paragraph styles, see sec
+\lang french
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+
\end_inset
.
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Requires
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-]
+[chaîne]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- indique que le style requiert la fonctionnalité chaîne.
- Voir la description de
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+
\lang english
-Provides
-\end_layout
-
+As with paragraph styles, see sec
+\lang french
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- ci-dessus (page
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:-Freespacing"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
\end_inset
-) pour les détails sur les fonctionnalités.
-
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
-indique si l'insert doit utiliser la police de caractères environnante ou
- bien utiliser la sienne propre.
+] indique si l'insert doit utiliser la police de caractères environnante
+ ou bien utiliser la sienne propre.
Valeur implicite; vrai, utiliser sa propre police.
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- active le correcteur orthographique sur le contenu de cet insert.
+] active le correcteur orthographique sur le contenu de cet insert.
Valeur implicite; vrai.
\end_layout
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Depuis la version 1.3.0 de LyX, il faut définir les compteurs (
+Il faut définir les compteurs (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-Counter
+Counter
\lang french
-nomCompteur
+ <nom>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-où bien entendu
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+où
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nom>
+\end_layout
-nomCompteur
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- est remplacé par le nom du compteur.
+ est le nom du compteur.
Et elle doit se terminer par
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+End
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Les paramètres suivants peuvent également être utilisés:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-End
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Les paramètres suivants peuvent également être utilisés:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString [chaîne=""]
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
- définit comment le compteur s'affiche.
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] définit comment le compteur s'affiche.
Fixer ce paramètre positionne également
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- (ou
+ (ou
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- peut être:
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-De fait, la situation est un peu plus compliquée; n'importe quel
-\emph on
-numbertype
-\emph default
- autre que ceux décrits ci-après produiront une numérotation en chiffres
- arabes.
- Il serait surprenant que cela change dans le futur.
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
+ peut être:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- pour la numérotation capitale romaine: I, II, III\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+ pour la numérotation capitale romaine: I, II, III.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Standard
+Si
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-hebrew
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour la numérotation hébraïque.
-\end_layout
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-Si LabelString est indéfini, une valeur implicite est construite comme suit:
- si le compteur a un compteur maître
+\lang french
+ est indéfini, une valeur implicite est construite comme suit: si le compteur
+ a un compteur maître
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-), la chaîne
+), la chaîne
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+LabelStringAppendix
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix [string=""]
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est identique à
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] est identique à
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
PrettyFormat
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-Section 2.4
+Section
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+2.4
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Within
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- et
+ et
+\begin_inset Newline linebreak
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- dans l'expression conditionnelle, comme dans:
+ dans l'expression conditionnelle, comme dans:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-.
- Ici, la clé
+
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Ici, la clé
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Standard
Voici donc un exemple utilisant toutes ces fonctionnalités:
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Standard
+\noindent
+\family typewriter
\lang english
!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
Ceci défini une macro qui imprime le nom de l'auteur, suivi d'un virgule,
si la clé
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
-, qui peuvent apparaître en dehors des déclarations de style et d'insert.
+, qui peu\SpecialChar \-
+vent apparaître en dehors des déclarations de style et d'insert.
Voir
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
-\emph default
-,1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
-indique s'il faut émettre l'information CSS implicite engendrée par LyX
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] indique s'il faut émettre l'information CSS implicite engendrée par LyX
pour ce style, même si une information complémentaire est explicitement
émise par
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
- ou
+ ou
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
-\emph default
-,1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
-, significatif uniquement pour les environnements de liste, contrôle si
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+], significatif uniquement pour les environnements de liste, contrôle si
la balise d'étiquetage est émise avant ou dans la balise d'élément.
Ceci est utilisé par exemple dans l'environnement de description, où l'on
veut
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
-\emph default
-,1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- identifie ce style comme celui à utiliser pour créer la balise
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] identifie ce style comme celui à utiliser pour créer la balise
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- précise les informations d'attribut à émettre avec la balise principale.
+] précise les informations d'attribut à émettre avec la balise principale.
Par exemple
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang english
0
-\emph default
-,1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
-indique s'il faut émettre l'information CSS implicite engendrée par LyX
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] indique s'il faut émettre l'information CSS implicite engendrée par LyX
pour cet insert, même si une information complémentaire est explicitement
émise par
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- fixe l'attribut de la balise interne.
- Vaut implicitement
+] fixe l'attribut de la balise interne.
+ Vaut implicitement
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- détermine la balise interne, et remplace
+] détermine la balise interne, et remplace
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-0,
\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- indique si cet insert représente un bloc autonome de texte (comme une note
- de bas de page) ou bien représente du contenu inclus dans le texte environnant
- (comme une branche).
+] indique si cet insert représente un bloc autonome de texte (comme une
+ note de bas de page) ou bien représente du contenu inclus dans le texte
+ environnant (comme une branche).
Vaut implicitement
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- définit une étiquette pour cet insert, pouvant inclure une référence à
+] définit une étiquette pour cet insert, pouvant inclure une référence à
un compteur.
Par exemple, pour une note de bas de page, ce peut être
\begin_inset Flex Code
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-définit l'information CSS à inclure quand ce style est utilisé.
+ définit l'information CSS à inclure quand ce style est utilisé.
Noter que le contenu sera automatiquement enclos dans un bloc
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-]
-\lang french
- définit la balise utilisé pour l'étiquette principale, qui remplace
+] définit la balise utilisé pour l'étiquette principale, qui remplace
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
-#LyX 2.1.0dev created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
+#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
\lyxformat 413
\begin_document
\begin_header
\font_osf false
\font_sf_scale 100
\font_tt_scale 100
+
\graphics default
\default_output_format default
\output_sync 0
\use_geometry false
\use_amsmath 0
\use_esint 0
-\use_mathdots 0
\use_mhchem 0
+\use_mathdots 0
\cite_engine basic
\use_bibtopic false
\use_indices false
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LYX_USERDIR_VER
+LYX_USERDIR_20x
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- 画面上の左余白の幅を指示する文字列。例：「MMMMM」。（これは、「2ex」のような「長さ」ではないことに注意してください。）
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+文字列
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] 画面上の左余白の幅を指示する文字列。例：「
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MMMMM
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+」。（これは、「2ex」のような「長さ」ではないことに注意してください。）
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- 画面上の右余白の幅を指示する文字列。例：「MMMMM」。
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+文字列
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] 画面上の右余白の幅を指示する文字列。例：「
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MMMMM
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+」。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- どの節区切りまで連番を振るかを指定します。LaTeXにおける
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] どの節区切りまで連番を振るかを指定します。LaTeXにおける
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- この部分は段落様式を定義します。様式がまだ存在していなければ、生成されます。既に存在していれば、そのパラメータが修正されます。「
+
+\lang english
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\lang japanese
+この部分は段落様式を定義します。様式がまだ存在していなければ、生成されます。既に存在していれば、そのパラメータが修正されます。「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle 1
+InTitle
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle 1
+InTitle
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- どの節区切りまで目次に取り込むかを指定します。LaTeXの
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] どの節区切りまで目次に取り込むかを指定します。LaTeXの
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PageStyle
+Other
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列="empty|plain|headings|fancy"
+文字列=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 使用できるページ様式の一覧です。「
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-|
+
+\backslash
+documentclass
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dで区切ります。
+ã\82³ã\83\9eã\83³ã\83\89ã\81®é\9d\9eå¿\85é \88ã\83\91ã\83©ã\83¡ã\83¼ã\82¿ã\81¨ã\81\97ã\81¦ä»\98ã\81\91å\8a ã\81\88ã\82\8bæ\96\87æ\9b¸ã\82¯ã\83©ã\82¹ã\82ªã\83\97ã\82·ã\83§ã\83³ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\82³ã\83³ã\83\9eで区切ります。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Other
+PageStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
+文字列="empty|plain|headings|fancy"
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+] 使用できるページ様式の一覧です。「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-documentclass
+|
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82³ã\83\9eã\83³ã\83\89ã\81®é\9d\9eå¿\85é \88ã\83\91ã\83©ã\83¡ã\83¼ã\82¿ã\81¨ã\81\97ã\81¦ä»\98ã\81\91å\8a ã\81\88ã\82\8bæ\96\87æ\9b¸ã\82¯ã\83©ã\82¹ã\82ªã\83\97ã\82·ã\83§ã\83³ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\82³ã\83³ã\83\9eで区切ります。
+ã\80\8dで区切ります。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
- この
+
+\lang english
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\lang japanese
+この
\emph on
前に
\emph default
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "des:FreeSpacing"
-
-\end_inset
-
-[
+ [
\emph on
\begin_inset Flex Code
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+ [
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[1, 0]
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 1の場合、様式が文書本体ではなく、文書プリアンブルにインクルードされるようにします。これは、タイトルや著者の情報をプリアンブルで設定する必要のある文書クラスに
-便利です。これは、
+の場合、様式が文書本体ではなく、文書プリアンブルにインクルードされるようにします。これは、タイトルや著者の情報をプリアンブルで設定する必要のある文書クラスに便利
+です。これは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
+ [
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[1, 0]
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 1の場合、このレイアウトをタイトルブロックの一部としてマークします（大域項目の
+の場合、このレイアウトをタイトルブロックの一部としてマークします（大域項目の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parsep
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Itemsep
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-自動連番に使われるカウンタ名（詳しくは第
+] 自動連番に使われるカウンタ名（詳しくは第
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:カウンタ"
\end_inset
- ラベルをどれくらい行頭下げすべきかを示す文字列。
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+文字列=""
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] ラベルをどれくらい行頭下げすべきかを示す文字列。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Labelsep
+LabelSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] ラベルと本文テキストの間の水平余白。本文テキストの上に来ないラベルにのみ使用されます。
+]
+\lang english
+Text that indicates the amount of
+\lang japanese
+ラベルと本文テキストの間の水平余白。本文テキストの上に来ないラベルにのみ使用されます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-節に述べられている特別な整形コマンドを含めることができます
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
+節に述べられている特別な整形コマンドを含めることができます。
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-後方互換性のために、
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-@
-\emph on
-style-name
-\emph default
-@
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-という文字列は、
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-style-name
+文字列=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-様式の
+] これは付録の中で
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-を展開したものに置換されます。この機能は既に廃されたものとなっているので、第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:カウンタ"
-
-\end_inset
+の代わりに用いられます。各
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-節の機構に置き換えられなくてはなりません。
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-] これは付録の中で
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-の代わりに用いられます。各
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-ステートメントは、
+ステートメントは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\emph on
No_Label
\emph default
-, Manual, Static, Top_Environment, Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive,
- Enumerate, Itemize, Bibliography
+, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Itemize, Bibliography
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、ラベルが最初の単語（最初の本当の空白まで）であることを示します。ラベルに2単語以上使用したいときは、保護された空白を使用してください。
+ は、ラベルが最初の単語（最初の本当の空白まで）であることを示します。ラベルに2単語以上使用したいときは、保護された空白を使用してください。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、ラベルが
+ は、ラベルが
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
で宣言したものであることを示します。これは「静的」であることに注意してください。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、
+ は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
レイアウトが使用したりします。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-はキャプションラベルの「図」や「表」の特別な場合です。
+ はキャプションラベルの「図」や「表」の特別な場合です。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
Type N」にハードコードされています。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-ラベル型は、自動的に連番が付されるラベルを定義します。
+ ラベル型は、自動的に連番が付されるラベルを定義します。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
節を参照してください。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、通常の連番ラベルを生成します。現在のところ、これは、第4階層まで順に、アラビア数字・小文字・小文字ローマ数字・大文字を使用するようにハードコードされています
-。
+ は、通常の連番ラベルを生成します。現在のところ、これは、第4階層まで順に、アラビア数字・小文字・小文字ローマ数字・大文字を使用するようにハードコードされていま
+ã\81\99ã\80\82
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、各階層でさまざまなブリットを生成します。これもハードコードされています。
+ は、各階層でさまざまなブリットを生成します。これもハードコードされています。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、LyXで内部的に使用され、
+ は、LyXで内部的に使用され、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- 対応するLaTeXの名称です。環境名かコマンド名を指します。
+
+\lang english
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\lang japanese
+対応するLaTeXの名称です。環境名かコマンド名を指します。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
+
+\lang english
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<parameter>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\lang japanese
対応する
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
Paragraph
\emph default
, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\end_layout
-
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environmen, Bib_Environment
+List_Environment, Bib_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、何も特別なことは意味しません。
+ は、何も特別なことは意味しません。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、
+ は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
を意味します。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、
+ は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
を意味します。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は
+ は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
がこの環境のすべての段落に付けられるところだけが異なっています。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は
+ は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
ダイアログで定義することができます。
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Bib_Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is like
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Environment
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ but adds additionally the necessary mandatory argument to the begin statement
+ of the bibliography environment:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+begin{thebibliography}{99}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ It is therefore only useful for bibliography environments.
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Standard
上記最後のいくつかをまとめると、LaTeX出力は、LaTeX型に依存して
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
-latexname[latexparam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
}
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
-begin{latexname}[latexparam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
\backslash
-end{latexname}.
+end{LatexName}.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
] レイアウトを環境の中に入れた場合、左余白は単純に加えられるのではなく、因子
-\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{depth+4}$
+\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{depth}+4}$
\end_inset
をかけて加えられます。このパラメータは、
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-引数は文字列として渡されます。たとえば「
+たとえば「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
このレイアウトの左余白の種類です。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は固定余白を示します。
+ は固定余白を示します。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、左余白が
+ は、左余白が
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
ダイアログで入力した文字列によって決められることを示します。これは、タブを用いずに整った一覧表を組むのに使用されます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、余白がラベルの大きさに依存することを示します。これは、自動連番の見出しに使用されます。「5.4.3.2.1 非常に長い見出し」という見出し行が、「3.2
+ は、余白がラベルの大きさに依存することを示します。これは、自動連番の見出しに使用されます。「5.4.3.2.1 非常に長い見出し」という見出し行が、「3.2
非常に長い見出し」よりも広い左余白（5.4.3.2.1足す空白と同じ幅）を必要とすることは明らかでしょう（標準的「ワープロ」はこんなことはやってくれませんが）。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は似ていますが、段落の最初の行だけがDynamicでその他の行はStaticです。これは、たとえば、箇条書き（記述）に使用されます。
+ は似ていますが、段落の最初の行だけがDynamicでその他の行はStaticです。これは、たとえば、箇条書き（記述）に使用されます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-は、段落中、最も長い行が右余白に合うように余白を選択します。これは、ページの右端に住所を組版するのに用いられます。
+ は、段落中、最も長い行が右余白に合うように余白を選択します。これは、ページの右端に住所を組版するのに用いられます。
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
+
+\lang english
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\lang japanese
このレイアウトが置き換えられたレイアウト名。これは、後方互換性を維持しながら、レイアウトの名称を変更するのに使用されます。
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parsep
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] このレイアウトが
+]
+\lang english
+Whether the style requires the feature
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+
+\lang english
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-で表される機能を必要するか否か。「機能」に関する情報は、上記
+.
+ See the description of
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Provides
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の説明（
+ above (sec
+\lang japanese
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:FreeSpacing"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:汎用テキストクラスパラメータ"
\end_inset
-ページ）をご参照ください。
+
+\lang english
+) for information on `features'
+\lang japanese
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\emph on
single
-\emph default
-, onehalf, double, other
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph on
-値
-\emph default
-] これはレイアウト中の既定の行間をどうすべきか定義するものです。引数の
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-single
+onehalf
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onehalf
+double
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+other
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<
+\emph on
+値
+\emph default
+>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\lang english
+
+\lang japanese
+これはレイアウト中の既定の行間をどうすべきか定義するものです。引数の
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+single
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+・
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+onehalf
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
は、
+\lang english
+LaTeX package
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace.sty
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-整数型
+整数型=3
\end_layout
\end_inset
\backslash
renewcommand{
\backslash
-claimname}{Affirmation}}
+claimname}{Affirmation}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\backslash
addto
\backslash
\backslash
renewcommand{
\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}}
+claimname}{Behauptung}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\backslash
providecommand{
\backslash
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
] フロートがドキュメントクラス中に既に定義されているのか、あるいは
+\lang english
+LaTeX package
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] この（非必須の）引数は、このクラスのフロートが文書中のある節単位ごとに番号を振り直されるべきかどうかを規定します。たとえば、引数に
+] この（非必須の）引数は、このクラスのフロートが文書中のある節単位ごとに番号を振り直されるべきかどうかを規定します。
+\lang english
+For example, if
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NumberWithin
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ is set to
+\lang japanese
+「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-と指定されていれば、フロートは章ごとに番号が振り直されます。
+ã\80\8dã\81¨æ\8c\87å®\9aã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8cã\81°ã\80\81ã\83\95ã\83ã\83¼ã\83\88ã\81¯ç« ã\81\94ã\81¨ã\81«ç\95ªå\8f·ã\81\8cæ\8c¯ã\82\8aç\9b´ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
] このフロートが、クラスファイルやパッケージ中で、
+\lang english
+LaTeX-package
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float.sty
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyXは第1.4.0版から文字様式をサポートしています。第1.6.0版以降、これは自由差込枠と呼ばれています。
-\end_layout
-
\begin_layout Standard
自由差込枠には次の3種類があります。
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 差込枠の背景色。有効な色彩は
+ [
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<name>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang japanese
+] 差込枠の背景色。
+\lang english
+The valid color names are defined in
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-ã\81§å®\9a義ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- [
+ [<型>]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
+
+\end_inset
+
+。
+\lang english
+Note that you need to specify the complete type, e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+g.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+
+\lang english
+CopyStyle Flex:<name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 既存の様式から、すべての機能を現在の様式にコピーします。
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の時のみ意味をもちます。環境を、LaTeX出力中で独立して出力させるか、周囲のテキストとインラインで出力させるかを示します。偽にすると、LaTeX環境は、
+の時のみ意味をもちます。環境を、出力中で独立して出力させるか、周囲のテキストとインラインで出力させるかを示します。偽にすると、LaTeX環境は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- InsetLayout宣言を閉じるのに必要です。
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+宣言を閉じるのに必要です。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- たとえばTeXコードやURLで「latex」言語が「左から右」（ラテン式）出力になるように強制します。うまく機能しません。
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] たとえばTeXコードやURLで「latex」言語が「左から右」（ラテン式）出力になるように強制します。うまく機能しません。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] LyXは、空白をそれ自体文字や記号ではなく、2つの単語の間の分割子として捉えているため、単語間に2つ以上の空白を入れることは、通常許可していません。これ自体
-はとても素晴らしいことですが、たとえばプログラムコードや生のLaTeXコードを入力しようとするときなどに、煩わしくなることがあります。このことから、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
-\end_layout
+
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
-ã\82\92æ\9c\89å\8a¹ã\81«ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cèª\8dã\82\81ã\82\89ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82LyXã\81¯ã\80\81LaTeXã\83¢ã\83¼ã\83\89以å¤\96ã\81§ã\81¯2ã\81¤ã\82\81以é\99\8dã\81®ç©ºç\99½ã\81«ã\81¯ã\80\81ä¿\9dè·ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81\9f空ç\99½ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81«æ³¨æ\84\8fã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84ã\80\82ã\80\82
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-] 段落を空のままにすると、LaTeX出力が空になってしまうので、通常、LyXは段落を空にすることを許可しません。しかしながら、これを無効にすることが望ましい場
-合が存在します。たとえば、書簡のひな型では、必須フィールドを人々が忘れないように、空のフィールドのまま提供する手もあります。特別なクラスにおいては、レイアウトを
-実際には文章を含まないある種の改行として使用することもあります。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
-\end_layout
-
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
- ラベルに使用されるフォント。第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:フォント指定"
-
-\end_inset
-節を参照。非効率を回避するため、この定義は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の前には決して現れてはなりません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
-\end_layout
-
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- ボタンなどに差込枠のラベルとして表示されるもの。差込枠型によっては（TeXコードや派生枝）、ラベルが動的に変更されます。
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\lang japanese
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
- 対応するLaTeX関連物の名称。環境名ないしはコマンド名。
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexParam
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 対応する
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
-\end_layout
+ ラベルに使用されるフォント。第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:フォント指定"
\end_inset
-関連物の非必須パラメータ。
+節を参照。非効率を回避するため、この定義は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[]
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-のような括弧対を含む。このパラメータはLyX内部から変更することはできません。
+の前には決して現れてはなりません。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-Paragraph
-\emph default
-, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environmen, Bib_Environment
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-] レイアウトがどのようにLaTeXに変換されるべきかを示します
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-これらのルールはSGMLクラスにも適用されるので、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-の名称は、少しミスリーディングかもしれません。特定の例については、SGMLクラスファイルを見てください。
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Paragraph
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、何も特別なことは意味しません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Command
-\end_layout
-
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-は、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-を意味します。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+]
+\lang english
+
+\lang japanese
+ボタンなどに差込枠のラベルとして表示されるもの。差込枠型によっては（TeXコードや派生枝）、ラベルが動的に変更されます。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-は、
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
LatexName
-\emph default
-}
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-を意味します。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+ [
+\lang english
-と同じですが、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-item
+\lang english
+<name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-がこの環境のすべての段落に付けられるところだけが異なっています。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
+\lang japanese
+] 対応するLaTeX関連物の名称。環境名ないしはコマンド名。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-は
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
-と同じですが、
+
+\lang english
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+
+\lang english
+<parameter>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が環境の引数として渡されるところだけが異なっています。
+]
+\lang japanese
+対応する
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+関連物の非必須パラメータ。
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-段落設定
+[]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83\80ã\82¤ã\82¢ã\83ã\82°ã\81§å®\9a義ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99。
+ã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81ªæ\8b¬å¼§å¯¾ã\82\92å\90«ã\82\80ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81®ã\83\91ã\83©ã\83¡ã\83¼ã\82¿ã\81¯LyXå\86\85é\83¨ã\81\8bã\82\89å¤\89æ\9b´ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81¯ã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-上記最後のいくつかをまとめると、LaTeX出力は、LaTeX型に依存して
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-latexname[latexparam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\end_layout
+
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-のようになるか、
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\lang japanese
-\backslash
-begin{latexname}[latexparam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{latexname}.
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
-\begin_layout Standard
-となります。
+\end_inset
+
+。
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] LaTeX出力中で、段落を空行ではなく、改行で区切るよう指定します。
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru 1
-\end_layout
+
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
-ã\81¨ä½µç\94¨ã\81\99ã\82\8cã\81°ã\80\81ï¼\88TeXã\82³ã\83¼ã\83\89ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\81¨ã\81\8dã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81«ï¼\89ã\83\86ã\82ã\82¹ã\83\88ã\82¨ã\83\87ã\82£ã\82¿ã\82\92ã\82¨ã\83\9fã\83¥ã\83¬ã\83¼ã\83\88ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] この段落の内容が、LaTeXが必要とするような特別な変換を行わずに、生の形で出力されるべきかどうか。
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
+
+\end_inset
+
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
- この様式が使用されたときに、LaTeXプリアンブルに付け加えるべき情報。この特定の様式が要求するマクロを定義したり、パッケージを読み込んだりと言ったことに使用
-します。「
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndPreamble
-\end_layout
+
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81§é\96\89ã\81\98ã\82\8bå¿\85è¦\81ã\81\8cã\81\82ã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-] このレイアウトが
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
-\end_layout
-
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-で表される機能を必要するか否か。「機能」に関する情報は、上記
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Provides
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\lang japanese
-の説明（
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand pageref
-reference "des:FreeSpacing"
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
-ã\83\9aã\83¼ã\82¸ï¼\89ã\82\92ã\81\94å\8f\82ç\85§ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84ã\80\82
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-LyX第1.3.0版以来、テキストクラス自体の中でカウンタ（
+
+\lang english
+It is necessary to define the counters
+\lang japanese
+（
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-」で終わらなくてはなりません。以下のパラメータを使用することができます。
+」で終わらなくてはなりません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+以下のパラメータを使用することができます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
-は以下のいずれかです
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-実は、事態はもう少し複雑です。以下に説明されているもの以外の
-\emph on
-numbertype
-\emph default
-は何であれ、アラビア数字を生成します。これが将来変更されたとしても不思議ではないでしょう。
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-。
+は以下のいずれかです。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
：I, II, III\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-（大文字ローマ数字）；
+（大文字ローマ数字）。
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Standard
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hebrew
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-（ヘブライ語数字）。
-\end_layout
-
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-LabelStringが定義されていないときは、既定値は以下のように組み立てられます。このカウンタに親カウンタ
+が定義されていないときは、既定値は以下のように組み立てられます。このカウンタに親カウンタ
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] このカウンタの整形参照で使用する書式。たとえば、節番号への参照を「Section 2.4」のように表示させたい場合には、文字列に「##」を含めます。これは、カ
-ウンタ番号で置換されます。したがって、節の場合には「Section ##」のようにします。
+] このカウンタの整形参照で使用する書式。たとえば、節番号への参照を「Section
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+2.4」のように表示させたい場合には、文字列に「##」を含めます。これは、カウンタ番号で置換されます。したがって、節の場合には「Section ##」のようにしま
+す。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
」とvolumeキーを出力するという意味です。また、
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
のように、条件の中にelse節を含めることも可能です。ここでは、もし
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Standard
以下は、これらの機能を全て使った例です。
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Standard
+\noindent
+
+\family typewriter
!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
これは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph on
0
-\emph default
-,1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0,
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] この差込枠が（脚注のように）独立した文字列ブロックを表すのか、それとも、（派生枝のように）周囲の文字列の中に取り込まれる素材を表すのか。既定値は1です。
+] この差込枠が（脚注のように）独立した文字列ブロックを表すのか、それとも、（派生枝のように）周囲の文字列の中に取り込まれる素材を表すのか。既定値は1です。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
projects / features.git / commitdiff